Mercedes Benz 2014 CLS Coupe Owner Manual

CLS
É2185843681+ËÍ
2185843681
Order no. 6515 1504 13 Part no. 218 584 36 81 Edition A 2014
CLS Operator's Manual
Operator's Manual
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
i Practical tips or further information that
RBluetooth®
X
is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered
trademarks of Apple Inc.
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of
Harman International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are
registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,
LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the
following symbols:
could be helpful to you.
This symbol indicates an
instruction that must be followed.
Several of these symbols in
X
succession indicate an instruction
with several steps.
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you
can find more information about a
topic.
This symbol indicates a warning or
YY
an instruction that is continued on
the next page.
Display This font indicates a display in the
multifunction display/COMAND
display.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are
protected by copyright © 2005
The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights
reserved.
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
only)
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or
suggestions you may have regarding this
Operator's Manual to the technical
documentation team at the following
address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
G WARNING
Warning notes draw your attention to hazards
that endanger your health or life, or the health
or life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware actions
or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
As at 20.07.2012
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage
to the vehicle or personal injury to you or
others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry
specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical
features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's
Manual
Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in the
vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
RMaintenance
2185843681 É2185843681+ËÍ
Contents
Index ....................................................... 4
At a glance ........................................... 29
Introduction ......................................... 21
Safety ................................................... 39
Opening and closing ........................... 75
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 115
Climate control ................................. 129
Driving and parking .......................... 145
On-board computer and displays .... 217
Stowage and features ...................... 277
Maintenance and care ...................... 305
Breakdown assistance ..................... 319
Wheels and tires ............................... 333
Technical data ................................... 371
3
4
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
12 V socket
see Sockets
4ETS
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic
Traction System)
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
drive) .................................................. 193
4MATIC off-road system ................... 193
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 238
Function/notes ................................ 66
Important safety notes .................... 66
Warning lamp ................................. 267
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 136
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 228
Display message ............................ 254
Function/information .................... 211
Active Driving Assistance package . 211
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 229
Display message ............................ 253
Function/information .................... 214
Active light function ......................... 121
Active multicontour seat
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 103
Active Parking Assist
Detecting parking spaces .............. 197
Display message ............................ 254
Function/notes ............................. 196
Important safety notes .................. 196
Parking .......................................... 198
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 190
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 248
Function/notes ............................. 121
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 376
Air bags
Display message ............................ 244
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 44
Important safety notes .................... 42
Knee bag .......................................... 45
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp .................................. 47
Pelvis air bag ................................... 46
Safety guidelines ............................. 41
Side impact air bag .......................... 45
Window curtain air bag .................... 47
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
AIR FLOW ........................................... 137
AIRMATIC
Display message ............................ 252
Function/notes ............................. 189
Air vents
Glove box ....................................... 142
Important safety notes .................. 142
Rear ............................................... 143
Setting ........................................... 142
Setting the center air vents ........... 142
Setting the side air vents ............... 142
Ambient lighting
Setting the brightness (on-board
computer) ...................................... 231
Setting the color (on-board
computer) ...................................... 231
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ................................................ 190
Ashtray ............................................... 287
Assistance display (on-board
computer) .......................................... 227
Assistance menu (on-board
computer) .......................................... 227
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 310
Hiding a service message .............. 310
Notes ............................................. 309
Resetting the service interval
display ........................................... 310
Service message ............................ 309
Special service requirements ......... 310
Index
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 74
Function ........................................... 74
Switching off the alarm .................... 74
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 228
Display message ............................ 251
Function/notes ............................. 203
Audio system
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 247
see Lights
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .................................... 152
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 151
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 117
Automatic transmission
Automatic drive program ............... 160
Changing gear ............................... 158
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 155
Display message ............................ 260
Drive program display .................... 156
Driving tips .................................... 158
Emergency running mode .............. 164
Engaging drive position .................. 158
Engaging neutral ............................ 157
Engaging park position (AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 157
Engaging reverse gear ................... 157
Engaging the park position ............ 156
Kickdown ....................................... 159
Manual drive program .................... 161
Manual drive program (AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 162
Manual drive program (vehicles
with Sports package AMG) ............ 162
Overview ........................................ 155
Problem (malfunction) ................... 164
Program selector button ................ 159
Pulling away ................................... 150
Selector lever ................................ 155
Shift ranges ................................... 162
Starting the engine ........................ 149
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 160
Transmission position display ........
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................
Transmission positions ..................
Automatic transmission
emergency mode ...............................
155
156
158
164
B
Backup lamp
Changing bulbs .............................. 125
Bag hook ............................................ 283
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) .................................................... 67
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 79
Important safety notes .................... 79
Replacing ......................................... 79
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 324
Display message ............................ 250
Important safety notes .................. 322
Jump starting ................................. 326
Belt force limiter
Activation ......................................... 59
Function ........................................... 59
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 228
Display message ............................ 254
Notes/function .............................. 207
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Bottle holder ...................................... 285
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 240
Notes ............................................. 376
Brake lamps
Display message ............................ 246
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 66
BAS .................................................. 67
BAS PLUS ........................................ 67
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 376
Display message ............................ 238
Driving tips .................................... 172
High-performance brake system .... 173
Important safety notes .................. 172
Maintenance .................................. 173
5
6
Index
Parking brake ................................ 169
Warning lamp ................................. 266
Breakdown
see Flat tire
see Towing away
Bulbs
see Changing bulbs
C
California
Important notice for retail
customers and lessees .................... 23
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Care
Carpets .......................................... 318
Car wash ........................................ 311
Display ........................................... 315
Exhaust pipe .................................. 315
Exterior lights ................................ 314
Gear or selector lever .................... 316
Interior ........................................... 315
Matte finish ................................... 313
Night View Assist Plus ................... 316
Notes ............................................. 311
Paint .............................................. 313
Plastic trim .................................... 316
Power washer ................................ 312
Rear view camera .......................... 315
Roof lining ...................................... 318
Seat belt ........................................ 317
Seat cover ..................................... 317
Sensors ......................................... 315
Steering wheel ............................... 316
Trim pieces .................................... 316
Washing by hand ........................... 312
Wheels ........................................... 314
Windows ........................................ 314
Wiper blades .................................. 314
Wooden trim .................................. 316
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 282
Car wash (care) ................................. 311
CD player/CD changer (on-board
computer) .......................................... 225
Center console
Lower section .................................. 35
Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 36
Upper section .................................. 34
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 232
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76
Changing bulbs
Important safety notes .................. 124
Overview of bulb types .................. 125
Reversing lamps ............................ 125
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 64
Rear doors ....................................... 65
Children
In the vehicle ................................... 60
Restraint systems ............................ 60
Special seat belt retractor ............... 63
Child seat
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 63
Top Tether ....................................... 64
Cigarette lighter ................................ 288
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ........................... 314
Climate control
Automatic climate control (3zone) .............................................. 134
Controlling automatically ............... 137
Cooling with air dehumidification . . 136
Defrosting the windows ................. 140
Defrosting the windshield .............. 139
Dual-zone automatic climate
control ........................................... 131
Important safety notes .................. 130
Indicator lamp ................................ 137
Information about using dual-zone
automatic climate control .............. 132
Information on using 3-zone
automatic climate control .............. 135
Maximum cooling .......................... 139
Overview of systems ...................... 130
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 137
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 141
Rear control panel ......................... 134
Index
Refrigerant ..................................... 378
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 379
Setting the air distribution ............. 138
Setting the airflow ......................... 139
Setting the air vents ...................... 142
Setting the climate mode (AIR
FLOW) ............................................ 137
Setting the temperature ................ 138
Setting the temperature with 3zone automatic climate control ..... 138
Setting the temperature with dualzone automatic climate control ..... 138
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 141
Switching on/off ........................... 135
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 141
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 140
Switching the ZONE function on/
off .................................................. 139
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 30
see Instrument cluster
Collapsible spare wheel
Inflating ......................................... 368
see Emergency spare wheel
COMAND
see separate operating instructions
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 315
Combination switch .......................... 119
Compass
Calibrating ..................................... 303
Calling up ....................................... 302
Setting ........................................... 302
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 222
Convenience closing feature .............. 90
Convenience opening feature ............ 89
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 308
Display message ............................ 248
Filling capacity ............................... 377
Important safety notes .................. 377
Temperature (on-board computer) . 234
Temperature gauge ........................ 219
Warning lamp ................................. 273
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 27
Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 245
Function/notes ............................. 121
Crash-responsive emergency
lighting ............................................... 124
Cruise control
Activation conditions ..................... 176
Cruise control lever ....................... 176
Deactivating ................................... 177
Display message ............................ 257
Driving system ............................... 175
Function/notes ............................. 175
Important safety notes .................. 175
Setting a speed .............................. 177
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 176
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 284
Center console in the rear
compartment ................................. 285
Important safety notes .................. 284
Rear compartment ......................... 285
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 26
Customer Relations Department ....... 26
D
Data
see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 247
Function/notes ............................. 117
Switching on/off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 230
Declarations of conformity ................. 25
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 231
Interior lighting .............................. 232
Diagnostics connection ...................... 25
Digital speedometer ......................... 223
DIRECT SELECT lever
see Automatic transmission
7
8
Index
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 309
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 237
Driving systems ............................. 251
Engine ............................................ 248
General notes ................................ 237
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 237
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 262
Lights ............................................. 245
Safety systems .............................. 238
SmartKey ....................................... 262
Tires ............................................... 258
Vehicle ........................................... 260
Distance recorder ............................. 222
see Trip odometer
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 275
DISTRONIC PLUS
Activating ....................................... 180
Activation conditions ..................... 180
Deactivating ................................... 184
Display message ............................ 255
Displays in the multifunction
display ........................................... 184
Function/notes ............................. 177
Important safety notes .................. 177
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 183
Warning lamp ................................. 275
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 232
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 83
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) ....................................... 76
Control panel ................................... 38
Display message ............................ 261
Emergency locking ........................... 84
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
Important safety notes .................... 82
Opening (from inside) ...................... 82
Drinking and driving ......................... 170
Drinks holder
see Bottle holder
Drive program
Automatic ...................................... 160
Display ........................................... 155
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 156
Manual ........................................... 161
Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 162
Manual (vehicles with Sports
package AMG) ............................... 162
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 234
Drive program selector ..................... 159
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 311
Symmetrical low beam .................. 116
Driving on flooded roads .................. 174
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) ............................................... 67
Electronic brake force distribution ... 71
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program) .......................................... 68
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
System) ........................................... 69
Important safety information ........... 66
Overview .......................................... 66
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 72
Driving systems
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 211
Active Driving Assistance
package ......................................... 211
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 214
Active Parking Assist ..................... 196
AIRMATIC ...................................... 189
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 190
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 203
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 207
Cruise control ................................ 175
Display message ............................ 251
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 177
HOLD function ............................... 186
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 209
Lane Tracking package .................. 207
Night View Assist Plus ................... 204
PARKTRONIC ................................. 193
RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 188
Rear view camera .......................... 199
Index
Driving tips
AMG ceramic brakes .....................
Automatic transmission .................
Brakes ...........................................
Break-in period ..............................
Downhill gradient ...........................
Drinking and driving .......................
Driving abroad ...............................
Driving in winter .............................
Driving on flooded roads ................
Driving on wet roads ......................
Exhaust check ...............................
Fuel ................................................
General ..........................................
Hydroplaning .................................
Icy road surfaces ...........................
Limited braking efficiency on
salted roads ...................................
Snow chains ..................................
Symmetrical low beam ..................
Wet road surface ...........................
DVD audio
Operating (on-board computer) .....
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) .....
173
158
172
146
172
170
116
174
174
174
170
170
169
174
174
172
337
116
172
225
226
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating ................. 233
Function/notes ............................. 108
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive ........................... 109
Function/notes ............................. 108
Switching on/off ........................... 233
EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Display message ............................ 240
Function/notes ................................ 71
ECO display
Function/notes ............................. 170
On-board computer ....................... 223
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 151
Deactivating/activating ................. 152
General information ....................... 151
Important safety notes .................. 151
Introduction ................................... 150
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 84
Fuel filler flap ................................. 166
Trunk ............................................... 88
Vehicle ............................................. 84
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes .................. 367
Points to remember ....................... 367
Removing ....................................... 368
Storage location ............................ 368
Stowing .......................................... 368
Technical data ............................... 370
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Function ........................................... 59
Safety guidelines ............................. 41
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 23
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 273
Display message ............................ 248
ECO start/stop function ................ 150
Engine number ............................... 373
Irregular running ............................ 154
Jump-starting ................................. 326
Starting problems .......................... 154
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 149
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 149
Switching off .................................. 168
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 331
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 154
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 308
Additives ........................................ 376
Checking the oil level ..................... 307
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 307
Display message ............................ 250
Filling capacity ............................... 376
Notes about oil grades ................... 375
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 307
Temperature (on-board computer) . 234
Viscosity ........................................ 376
9
10
Index
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program)
AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 234
Deactivating/activating (AMG
vehicles) .......................................... 70
Deactivating/activating (except
AMG vehicles) ................................ 227
Deactivating/activating (notes;
except AMG vehicles) ...................... 69
Display message ............................ 238
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 69
Function/notes ................................ 68
Important safety information ........... 68
Warning lamp ................................. 269
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
System) ................................................ 69
Exhaust check ................................... 170
Exhaust pipe (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 315
Exterior lighting
Setting options .............................. 116
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ....................................... 109
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 111
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 110
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 110
Folding in when locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 233
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 110
Setting ........................................... 110
Storing settings (memory
function) ........................................ 112
Storing the parking position .......... 111
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 279
F
Filler cap
see Fuel filler flap
First-aid kit .........................................
Flat tire
MOExtended tires ..........................
Preparing the vehicle .....................
Floormat .............................................
Fuel
Additives ........................................
Consumption statistics ..................
320
321
321
303
375
222
Displaying the current
consumption .................................. 223
Displaying the range ...................... 223
Driving tips .................................... 170
Fuel gauge ............................... 31, 219
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 374
Important safety notes .................. 374
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 374
Problem (malfunction) ................... 167
Refueling ........................................ 164
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 374
Fuel filler flap
Emergency release ........................ 166
Opening/closing ............................ 165
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 223
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 374
Problem (malfunction) ................... 167
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
kit) ...................................................... 320
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 331
Before changing ............................. 331
Fuse box in the engine
compartment ................................. 332
Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 332
Important safety notes .................. 331
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 301
Important safety notes .................. 299
Opening/closing the garage door .. 301
Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 299
Gear indicator (on-board
computer) .......................................... 234
Genuine ................................................ 22
Glove box ........................................... 279
H
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 120
Head bags
Display message ............................ 242
Index
Headlamps
Adding fluid to cleaning system .....
Cleaning system (function) ............
Cleaning system (notes) ................
Fogging up .....................................
see Automatic headlamp mode
Head restraints
Adjusting .......................................
Adjusting (electrically) ...................
Adjusting (rear) ..............................
Installing/removing (rear) ..............
Luxury ............................................
Heating
see Climate control
High-beam headlamps
Display message ............................
Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Assist on/off .................................
Switching on/off ...........................
Hill start assist ..................................
HOLD function
Display message ............................
Function/notes .............................
Hood
Closing ...........................................
Display message ............................
Important safety notes ..................
Opening .........................................
Hydroplaning .....................................
Manual control ...............................
Overview ........................................
Reading lamp .................................
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board
computer) ......................................
Setting the brightness of the
display/switch (on-board
computer) ......................................
Setting the color of the ambient
lighting (on-board computer) .........
309
120
378
122
100
101
101
102
101
246
122
119
150
252
186
307
261
306
306
174
I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 73
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Instrument cluster
Overview .................................. 31, 219
Settings ......................................... 229
Warning and indicator
lamps ....................................... 32, 264
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 230
Interior lighting ................................. 123
Automatic control .......................... 123
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 232
Emergency lighting ........................ 124
124
123
123
231
230
231
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 320
Using ............................................. 359
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 326
K
KEYLESS-GO
Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Display message ............................ 262
Locking ............................................ 77
Start/Stop button .......................... 147
Starting the engine ........................ 149
Unlocking ......................................... 77
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 147
SmartKey ....................................... 147
Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 159
Manual drive program .................... 163
Knee bag .............................................. 45
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 229
Display message ............................ 253
Function/information .................... 209
Lane Tracking package ..................... 207
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 235
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 63
11
12
Index
Light function, active
Display message ............................ 247
Lights
Activating/deactivating the
interior lighting delayed switch-off . 232
Active light function ....................... 121
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 117
Cornering light function ................. 121
Driving abroad ............................... 116
Hazard warning lamps ................... 120
High beam flasher .......................... 120
High-beam headlamps ................... 119
Light switch ................................... 116
Low-beam headlamps .................... 118
Parking lamps ................................ 118
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 231
Setting the brightness of the
display/switch (on-board
computer) ...................................... 230
Setting the color of the ambient
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 231
Standing lamps .............................. 119
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 230
Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 231
Switching the surround lighting
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 231
Turn signals ................................... 119
see Changing bulbs
see Interior lighting
Light sensor (display message) ....... 247
Loading guidelines ............................ 278
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 83
Emergency locking ........................... 84
From inside (central locking
button) ............................................. 83
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 232
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................
Setting for driving abroad
(symmetrical) .................................
Switching on/off ...........................
Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
support ..........................................
Luxury head restraints .....................
245
116
118
103
101
M
M+S tires ............................................ 336
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Massage function (PULSE) ............... 103
Matte finish (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 313
mbrace
Call priority .................................... 294
Display message ............................ 241
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 294
Downloading routes ....................... 298
Emergency call .............................. 291
Geo fencing ................................... 298
Important safety notes .................. 290
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 297
MB info call button ........................ 293
Remote vehicle locking .................. 296
Roadside Assistance button .......... 293
Search & Send ............................... 295
Self-test ......................................... 291
Speed alert .................................... 298
System .......................................... 291
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 299
Vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis ....................................... 297
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 296
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 78
Locking vehicle ................................ 84
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84
Memory card (audio) ......................... 225
Memory function ............................... 112
Message memory (on-board
computer) .......................................... 237
Index
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 226
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ........................................... 77
MOExtended tires .............................. 321
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 361
Mounting a new wheel ................... 360
Raising the vehicle ......................... 359
Removing a wheel .......................... 360
Securing the vehicle against
rolling away ................................... 358
MP3
Operation ....................................... 225
see separate operating instructions
Multicontour seat
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 102
Multifunction display
Function/notes ............................. 221
Permanent display ......................... 230
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer . 220
Overview .......................................... 33
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 224
NECK-PRO head restraints
Operation ......................................... 53
Resetting after being triggered ........ 54
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Operation ......................................... 53
Resetting after being triggered ........ 54
Night View Assist Plus
Activating/deactivating ................. 205
Cleaning ......................................... 316
Function/notes ............................. 204
Problem (malfunction) ................... 207
Notes on breaking-in a new
vehicle ................................................ 146
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Faults ............................................... 52
Operation ......................................... 47
System self-test ............................... 50
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 60
Important safety notes .................... 40
OCS
Faults ............................................... 52
Operation ......................................... 47
System self-test ............................... 50
Odometer ........................................... 222
see Trip odometer
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 234
Assistance menu ........................... 227
Audio menu ................................... 225
Convenience submenu .................. 233
Displaying a service message ........ 310
Display messages .......................... 237
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 184
Factory settings submenu ............. 234
Important safety notes .................. 218
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 229
Lighting submenu .......................... 230
Menu overview .............................. 222
Message memory .......................... 237
Navigation menu ............................ 224
Operation ....................................... 220
RACETIMER ................................... 235
Service menu ................................. 229
Settings menu ............................... 229
Standard display ............................ 222
Telephone menu ............................ 226
Trip menu ...................................... 222
Vehicle submenu ........................... 232
Video DVD operation ..................... 226
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 25
Important safety notes .................... 24
Operating system
see On-board computer
13
14
Index
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ........................... 22
Outside temperature display ........... 220
Overhead control panel ...................... 37
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 65
P
Paint code number ............................ 372
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 313
Panic alarm .......................................... 40
Parking ............................................... 167
Important safety notes .................. 167
Parking brake ................................ 169
Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 111
Rear view camera .......................... 199
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Active Parking Assist ..................... 196
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Display message ............................ 240
Notes/function .............................. 169
Warning lamp ................................. 272
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 118
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 195
Driving system ............................... 193
Function/notes ............................. 193
Important safety notes .................. 193
Problem (malfunction) ................... 196
Range of the sensors ..................... 194
Warning display ............................. 195
PASS AIR BAG OFF
see PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Indicator lamp .................................. 47
Problems (malfunction) .................. 244
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 316
Power washers .................................. 312
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
Display message ............................ 241
Operation ......................................... 54
PRE-SAFE® Brake
Activating/deactivating ................. 228
Display message ............................ 241
Function/notes ................................ 72
Warning lamp ................................. 275
Product information ............................ 21
Program selector button .................. 159
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 21
Pulling away (automatic
transmission) ..................................... 150
Q
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26
R
RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 188
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 235
Radar sensor system
Activating/deactivating ................. 232
Display message ............................ 252
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 225
see separate operating instructions
Radio-based vehicle components
Declaration of conformity ................ 25
Reading lamp ..................................... 123
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents ...................... 143
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 246
Rear seat (folding the backrest
forwards/back) ................................. 281
Rear seats
Display message ............................ 261
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 315
Function/notes ............................. 199
Switching on/off ........................... 200
Rear-view mirror
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 111
Rear window blind ............................ 287
Index
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 141
Switching on/off ........................... 140
Refrigerant (air-conditioning
system)
Important safety notes .................. 378
Refueling
Fuel gauge ............................... 31, 219
Important safety notes .................. 164
Refueling process .......................... 165
see Fuel
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 299
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 299
Reporting safety defects .................... 26
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 251
Warning lamp ................................. 273
see Fuel
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 141
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 155
Reversing feature
Side windows ................................... 88
Sliding sunroof ................................. 93
Reversing lamps (display
message) ............................................ 246
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23
Roller sunblind
Rear window .................................. 287
Roof carrier ........................................ 283
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 318
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 379
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle .....................
Child restraint systems ....................
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ...............................................
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt .........................
Adjusting the height .........................
60
60
47
57
58
Belt force limiters ............................ 59
Cleaning ......................................... 317
Correct usage .................................. 56
Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 59
Fastening ......................................... 56
Important safety guidelines ............. 55
Releasing ......................................... 58
Safety guidelines ............................. 41
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 233
Warning lamp ................................. 265
Warning lamp (function) ................... 58
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
support .......................................... 103
Adjusting the active multicontour
seat ............................................... 103
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 100
Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 102
Cleaning the cover ......................... 317
Correct driver's seat position ........... 98
Important safety notes .................... 99
Massage function .......................... 103
Overview .......................................... 99
Seat backrest display message ..... 261
Seat heating problem .................... 105
Seat ventilation problem ................ 106
Storing settings (memory
function) ........................................ 112
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 104
Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 105
Selector lever
Cleaning ......................................... 316
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 315
Service menu (on-board computer) . 229
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 376
Coolant (engine) ............................ 377
Engine oil ....................................... 375
Fuel ................................................ 374
Important safety notes .................. 373
Refrigerant (air-conditioning
system) .......................................... 378
Washer fluid ................................... 378
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 234
On-board computer ....................... 229
15
16
Index
Setting the air distribution ............... 138
Setting the airflow ............................ 139
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 234
Side impact air bag ............................. 45
Side marker lamp (display
message) ............................................ 247
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 314
Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Convenience opening feature .......... 89
Important safety information ........... 88
Opening/closing .............................. 89
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92
Resetting ......................................... 91
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes .................... 92
Opening/closing .............................. 93
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95
Resetting ......................................... 94
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 79
Changing the programming ............. 77
Checking the battery ....................... 79
Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Convenience opening feature .......... 89
Display message ............................ 262
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76
Important safety notes .................... 76
Loss ................................................. 81
Mechanical key ................................ 78
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 147
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81
Starting the engine ........................ 149
Snow chains ...................................... 337
Sockets
Center console .............................. 289
General notes ................................ 289
Rear compartment ......................... 290
Trunk ............................................. 290
Under the armrest ......................... 289
Spare wheel
Stowing .......................................... 368
Specialist workshop ............................ 26
Special seat belt retractor .................. 63
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital ............................................ 223
In the Instrument cluster ......... 31, 219
Segments ...................................... 220
Selecting the unit of
measurement ................................ 229
see Instrument cluster
SPORT handling mode
Activating/deactivating (AMG
vehicles) .......................................... 70
Warning lamp ................................. 270
SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Display message ............................ 242
Introduction ..................................... 41
Warning lamp ................................. 272
Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 246
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 149
Steering (display message) .............. 262
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106
Button overview ............................... 33
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 220
Cleaning ......................................... 316
Important safety notes .................. 106
Paddle shifters ............................... 160
Steering wheel heating .................. 107
Storing settings (memory
function) ........................................ 112
Steering wheel heating
Problem (malfunction) ................... 108
Switching on/off ........................... 107
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 160
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 235
Stowage areas ................................... 278
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) ............................. 280
Center console .............................. 279
Cup holders ................................... 284
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 279
Glove box ....................................... 279
Important safety information ......... 278
Rear ............................................... 281
Index
Stowage net ................................... 281
Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 280
Stowage net ....................................... 281
Stowage space
Center console (rear) ..................... 280
Stowage well beneath the trunk
floor .................................................... 283
Summer tires ..................................... 336
Sun visor ............................................ 286
Surround lighting (on-board
computer) .......................................... 231
Suspension tuning
AIRMATIC ...................................... 190
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 191
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 234
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 141
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 74
T
Tachometer ........................................ 219
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 246
Tank content
Fuel gauge ............................... 31, 219
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 373
Emergency spare wheel ................. 370
Information .................................... 372
Tires/wheels ................................. 362
Vehicle data ................................... 379
TELEAID
Call priority .................................... 294
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 294
Downloading routes ....................... 298
Emergency call .............................. 291
Geo fencing ................................... 298
Important safety notes .................. 290
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 297
MB info call button ........................ 293
Remote vehicle locking .................. 296
Roadside Assistance button .......... 293
Search & Send ............................... 295
Self-test ......................................... 291
Speed alert .................................... 298
System .......................................... 291
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 299
Vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis ....................................... 297
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 296
Telephone
Accepting a call ............................. 226
Display message ............................ 262
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 226
Number from the phone book ........ 226
Redialing ........................................ 227
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 226
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 219
Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 234
Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 234
Outside temperature ...................... 220
Setting (climate control) ................ 138
Theft deterrent systems
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74
Immobilizer ...................................... 73
Through-loading feature ................... 281
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 235
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 342
Checking manually ........................ 341
Display message ............................ 258
Maximum ....................................... 340
Notes ............................................. 339
Recommended ............................... 338
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes ................................ 341
Important safety notes .................. 341
Restarting ...................................... 342
Tire pressure monitoring system
Checking the tire pressure
electronically ................................. 344
Function/notes ............................. 342
Restarting ...................................... 345
Warning lamp ................................. 276
Warning message .......................... 344
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 356
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 355
Bar (definition) ............................... 354
Changing a wheel .......................... 357
17
18
Index
Characteristics ..............................
Checking ........................................
Definition of terms .........................
Direction of rotation ......................
Display message ............................
Distribution of the vehicle
occupants (definition) ....................
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ...............................................
DOT (Department of
Transportation) (definition) ............
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) .....................................
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
(definition) .....................................
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) (definition) .........................
Important safety notes ..................
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ......
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...........
Labeling (overview) ........................
Load bearing index (definition) ......
Load index .....................................
Load index (definition) ...................
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) .....................................
Maximum load on a tire
(definition) .....................................
Maximum permissible tire
pressure (definition) .......................
Maximum tire load .........................
Maximum tire load (definition) .......
MOExtended tires ..........................
Optional equipment weight
(definition) .....................................
PSI (pounds per square inch)
(definition) .....................................
Replacing .......................................
Service life .....................................
Sidewall (definition) .......................
Speed rating (definition) ................
Storing ...........................................
Structure and characteristics
(definition) .....................................
Temperature ..................................
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) .....................................
354
335
354
357
258
357
354
355
355
355
355
334
355
355
351
356
353
355
355
356
356
353
356
336
356
356
357
336
356
355
357
354
350
356
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 356
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 356
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 355
Tire size (data) ............................... 362
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating .................... 351
Tire tread ....................................... 335
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 356
Total load limit (definition) ............. 357
Traction ......................................... 350
Traction (definition) ....................... 356
Tread wear ..................................... 350
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 349
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 355
Unladen weight (definition) ............ 356
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 356
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 355
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 64
Towing
Important safety guidelines ........... 328
Installing the towing eye ................ 329
Removing the towing eye ............... 330
With the rear axle raised ................ 330
Towing away
With both axles on the ground ....... 330
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 331
Important safety notes .................. 328
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display ......... 156
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 156
Transporting the vehicle .................. 330
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 316
Trip computer (on-board
computer) .......................................... 222
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 222
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 223
Trunk
Emergency release .......................... 87
Important safety notes .................... 84
Opening/closing (automatically
from inside) ...................................... 86
Index
Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 86
Opening/closing (manually from
outside) ............................................ 85
Trunk lid
Display message ............................ 261
Opening/closing .............................. 84
Opening dimensions ...................... 379
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 379
Turn signals
Display message ............................ 245
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 83
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 286
Vehicle
Data acquisition ............................... 27
Display message ............................ 260
Equipment ....................................... 22
Individual settings .......................... 229
Limited Warranty ............................. 26
Loading .......................................... 345
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76
Lowering ........................................ 361
Maintenance .................................... 23
Parking for a long period ................ 169
Pulling away ................................... 150
Raising ........................................... 359
Reporting problems ......................... 26
Securing from rolling away ............ 358
Towing away .................................. 328
Transporting .................................. 330
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76
Vehicle data ................................... 379
Vehicle data ....................................... 379
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 379
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 372
Vehicle level
AIRMATIC ...................................... 189
Vehicle level (display message) ....... 252
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 320
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 226
VIN ...................................................... 372
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 267
Brakes ........................................... 266
Check Engine ................................. 273
Coolant .......................................... 273
Distance warning ........................... 275
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 275
ESP® .............................................. 269
ESP® OFF ....................................... 270
Fuel tank ........................................ 273
Overview .................................. 32, 264
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 47
Reserve fuel ................................... 273
Seat belt ........................................ 265
SPORT handling mode ................... 270
SRS ................................................ 272
Tire pressure monitor .................... 276
Warranty ............................................ 372
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 262
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 361
Wheel chock ...................................... 358
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 357
Checking ........................................ 335
Cleaning ......................................... 314
Cleaning (warning) ......................... 357
Emergency spare wheel ................. 367
Important safety notes .................. 334
Interchanging/changing ................ 357
Mounting a new wheel ................... 360
Mounting a wheel .......................... 358
Removing a wheel .......................... 360
Storing ........................................... 357
19
20
Index
Tightening torque ........................... 361
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 362
Window curtain air bag
Operation ......................................... 47
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 139
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 309
Notes ............................................. 378
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 128
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 126
Switching on/off ........................... 125
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 336
Slippery road surfaces ................... 174
Snow chains .................................. 337
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 336
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 314
Important safety notes .................. 126
Replacing ....................................... 126
Wooden trim (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 316
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 139
Introduction
Protection of the environment
General notes
H Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of
comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating
conditions of your vehicle
personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
Ryour
Ravoid
short trips as these increase fuel
consumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Ralways have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
Rswitch
off the engine in stationary traffic.
an eye on the vehicle's fuel
consumption.
Rkeep
Environmental concerns and
recommendations
Wherever the operating instructions require
you to dispose of materials, first try to
regenerate or re-use them. Observe the
relevant environmental rules and regulations
when disposing of materials. In this way you
will help to protect the environment.
Product information
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion
parts and accessories that have been
approved for your vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories that have
been specifically approved for your vehicle for
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
unable to assess other parts. Therefore,
Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz
vehicles. This is also the case, even if they
have been independently or officially
approved. The use of non-approved parts
could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved
conversion parts and accessories are
available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Here, you will receive advice about
permissible technical modifications, and the
parts will be professionally installed.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
Ravoid
Z
21
22
Introduction
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Devices, as well as control units and
sensors for these restraint systems, may be
installed in the following areas of your
vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor
pillars
Rdoor sills
Rseats
Rcockpit
Rinstrument cluster
Rcenter console
Do not install accessories such as audio
systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint
systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at
a qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels
as well as accessories relevant to safety
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safetyrelevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and
accessories that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been
specifically developed, manufactured or
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should therefore be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts for necessary service and repair work.
In addition, strategically located parts
delivery centers provide quick and reliable
parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification
number (VIN) (Y page 372) and the engine
number (Y page 373) when ordering genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts.
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may
not feature all functions described here. This
also applies to safety-relevant systems and
functions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all
systems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
be kept in the vehicle.
Introduction
Service and vehicle operation
Service and literature
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew
Vehicle Limited Warranty
Systems Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
REmission
Information for customers in
California
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a
reasonable number of repair attempts
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles
(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a
reasonable number of repair attempts is
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or
more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect
or malfunction has been subject to repair
two or more times, and you have directly
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in
writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly
notified us in writing of the need for its
repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
all the necessary maintenance work which
should be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty
Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle
to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
service advisor will record every service for
you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program offers technical help in the event of
a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our
agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside
Assistance" section in the Service and
Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both
in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Z
23
24
Introduction
Change of address or change of
ownership
In the event of a change of address, please
send us the "Notification of Address Change"
in the Service and Guarantee booklet or
simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline
number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
contacting you in a timely manner should the
need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
Rservice
facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic
converter.
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available
for delivery in Europe through our European
Delivery Program. For details, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to
one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/
maintenance work as well as any required
repairs carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other
networked components. In particular,
systems relevant to safety could also be
affected. As a result, these may no longer
function as intended and/or jeopardize the
operating safety of the vehicle. There is an
increased risk of an accident and injury.
Introduction
Never tamper with the wiring as well as
electronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.
a curb or a hole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage
or parts of the chassis.
In situations like this, the body, the
undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or
tires could be damaged without the
damage being visible. Components
damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail
or, in the case of an accident, no longer
withstand the strain they are designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
combustible materials such as leaves,
grass or twigs can gather between the
underbody and the underbody paneling. If
these materials come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system for an
extended period, they can catch fire.
Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop. If on continuing your journey
you notice that driving safety is impaired,
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic
conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified
specialist workshop.
Ryou
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the two following two
conditions: 1) These devices may not cause
harmful interference, and 2) These devices
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These
devices must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not connect any equipment to a
diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats.
! If the engine is switched off and
equipment on the diagnostics connection
is used, the starter battery may discharge.
Z
25
26
Introduction
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
connection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
requirements of the next emissions test
during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
qualified specialist workshop. It has the
necessary specialist knowledge, tools and
qualifications to correctly carry out the work
required on your vehicle. This is especially the
case for work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork
relevant to safety
and maintenance work
Rrepair work
Ralterations, installation work and
modifications
Rwork on electronic components
Rservice
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or
contact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
instructions is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Introduction
Data stored in the vehicle
Information about electronic data
acquisition in the vehicle
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Your vehicle records electronic data. If your
vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:
TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of
an accident.
This information helps, for example, to test
vehicle systems after an accident and to
continually improve vehicle safety.
Daimler AG can access this data and submit
it:
Rfor
safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner
Ron the instruction of prosecuting
authorities
Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that
involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales
and service organizations
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE
AID) purchase agreement to find out more
about data that can be recorded and
transmitted by this system.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the
following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
27
28
Dashboard ...........................................
Instrument cluster ..............................
Multifunction steering wheel .............
Center console ....................................
Overhead control panel ......................
Door control panel ..............................
30
31
33
34
37
38
At a glance
29
30
Dashboard
At a glance
Dashboard
Function
Page
:
Steering wheel paddle
shifters
160
;
Cruise control lever
=
Instrument cluster
?
Horn
A
DIRECT SELECT lever
155
B
PARKTRONIC warning
display
193
C
Overhead control panel
37
D
Climate control systems
130
E
Ignition lock
Start/Stop button
147
147
Function
Page
F
Adjusts the steering wheel
Steering wheel heating
106
107
176
G
Combination switch
119
31
H
Parking brake
169
I
Diagnostics connection
J
Opens the hood
306
K
Releases the parking brake
169
L
Light switch
116
M
Night View Assist Plus
204
25
Instrument cluster
31
Instrument cluster
Function
At a glance
Displays
Page
:
Speedometer with
segments
220
;
Multifunction display
221
=
Tachometer
219
i Adjust the instrument cluster lighting
using the on-board computer
(Y page 230).
Function
?
Coolant temperature
A
Fuel gauge
Page
219
32
Instrument cluster
At a glance
Warning and indicator lamps
Function
:
Page
÷ ESP®
M SPORT handling
mode in AMG vehicles
269
;
· Distance warning
275
=
å ESP® OFF
269
?
#! Turn signals
119
A
$ Brakes (USA only)
266
B
J Brakes (Canada only)
266
C
! ABS
267
D
6 SRS
272
E
; Check Engine
273
F
h Tire pressure monitor
276
270
Function
Page
G
ü Seat belt
265
H
÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles
270
I
? Coolant
273
J
K High-beam
headlamps
119
L Low-beam
headlamps
118
L
T Parking lamps
118
M
R This lamp has no
function
N
8 Reserve fuel
K
273
Multifunction steering wheel
33
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
:
Multifunction display
;
COMAND display; see the
separate operating
instructions
=
?
Switches on the Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating
instructions
?
~
Rejects or ends a call
Exits phone book/redial
memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial
memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
Page
221
Function
A
B
226
=;
Selects a menu
9:
Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists
a
Confirms your selection
Hides display messages
%
Back
Switches off the Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating
instructions
Page
220
220
220
237
220
34
Center console
At a glance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function
Page
:
COMAND; see the separate
operating instructions
;
c Seat heating
104
=
s Seat ventilation
105
?
c PARKTRONIC
193
A
¤ ECO start/stop
function (AMG vehicles)
150
Function
Page
B
45 Indicator lamp
C
£ Hazard warning
lamps
120
u Roller sunblind in the
rear window
287
D
47
Center console
35
At a glance
Center console, lower section
Function
E
Page
Stowage compartment
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Socket
Cup holder
278
287
288
289
284
F
Cup holder
284
G
e Sets the suspension
tuning
190
Function
Page
H
É Sets the vehicle level
189
I
Stowage compartment
278
J
Ú Selects the drive
program
159
K
COMAND controller; see
the separate operating
instructions
36
Center console
At a glance
Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)
Function
Page
E
Cup holder
284
J
Stowage compartment
278
F
Engages parking position P
168
K
G
Selector lever
155
ß Calls up/saves the
suspension tuning
191
H
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Socket
287
288
289
à Sets the suspension
tuning
191
I
COMAND controller; see
the separate operating
instructions
Function
L
M
å ESP®
N
Drive program selector
Page
70
159
Overhead control panel
37
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function
:
;
=
?
A
B
u Switches the rear
interior lighting on/off
Page
124
p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off
123
ï MB Info call button
(mbrace system)
293
93
G SOS button (mbrace
system)
291
C
Rear-view mirror
111
D
Buttons for the garage door
opener
299
Page
E
Integrated electronic
compass
F
Microphone for mbrace
(emergency call system),
telephone and Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating
instructions
G
F Roadside Assistance
call button (mbrace
system)
293
p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off
123
c Switches the front
interior lighting on/off
124
124
| Switches the
automatic interior lighting
control on/off
3 Opens/closes the
sliding sunroof
Function
H
I
302
38
Door control panel
At a glance
Door control panel
Function
:
Page
Function
B
r45=
Stores settings for the seat,
exterior mirrors and
steering wheel
112
;
Adjusts the seats
electrically
100
=
%& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle
83
?
Opens the door
82
A
7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the
exterior mirrors in/out
electrically
109
C
D
Page
W Opens/closes the
side windows
89
n Activates/
deactivates the override
feature for the side
windows in the rear
compartment
65
p Opens/closes the
trunk lid
86
Useful information ..............................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Occupant safety ..................................
Children in the vehicle ........................
Driving safety systems .......................
Theft deterrent locking system .........
40
40
40
60
66
73
Safety
39
Occupant safety
40
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
Safety
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Panic alarm
Occupant safety
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Modifications to the restraint systems could
result in them not functioning properly any
more. The restraint systems could then no
longer protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do and could fail in the event of
an accident or activate unexpectedly, for
example. There is an increased risk of injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint systems.
Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as
electronic components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.
USA only: for further information contact our
Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).
In this section, you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint system consists of:
RSeat
belts
restraint systems
RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system
Additional protection is provided by:
RChild
To activate: press ! button : for at
least one second.
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
flashes.
X To deactivate: press ! button :
again.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the
vehicle.
X
RSRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints
RPRE-SAFE®
RAir bag system components with:
- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
- Front-passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
The different air bag systems work
independently of each other. The protective
functions of the system work in conjunction
with each other. Not all air bags are deployed
in an accident.
RNECK-PRO
Occupant safety
traveling with you in the vehicle as well as
restraint systems for infants and children,
see "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 60).
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Introduction
RS consists of:
RThe
6 RS warning lamp
bags
RThe air bag control unit with crash sensors
REmergency Tensioning Device for the front
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the
rear
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
RS reduces the risk of occupants coming into
contact with the vehicle's interior in the event
of an accident. It can also reduce the effect
of the forces to which occupants are
subjected during an accident.
RAir
SRS warning lamp
G WARNING
If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint
system components may be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
in the event of an accident with a high rate of
vehicle deceleration. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Have SRS checked and repaired immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
SRS functions are checked regularly when
you switch on the ignition and when the
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
can be detected in good time.
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
after the engine is started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness when the 6 SRS indicator lamp
goes out while the engine is running.
There is a malfunction if:
Rthe
6 SRS warning lamp does not light
up when the ignition is switched on
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
warning lamp does not go out after a few
seconds
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up again.
Safety guidelines for seat belts,
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
and air bags
G WARNING
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
perchlorate material, which may require
special handling and regard for the
environment. Check your national disposal
guidelines. California residents, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that has deployed must be replaced. PRESAFE® has electrically operated reversible
belt tensioners in addition to the
pyrotechnic ETDs.
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
RDo not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Z
Safety
i For information on infants and children
41
42
Occupant safety
Safety
RNo
modifications of any kind may be made
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
RDo not change or remove any component
or part of the SRS.
RDo not install additional trim material, seat
covers, badges, etc. to the:
- padded steering wheel boss
- knee bag covers
- front-passenger air bag cover
- outer side of front seat bolsters
- side trim next to the rear seat backrest
- roof lining trim
RDo not install additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring.
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may be thrown around in
the vehicle and cause head and other
injuries when the window curtain air bag is
deployed.
RAir bag system components will be hot after
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended air bag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RFor your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
ETD, our safety instructions must be
followed. These instructions are available
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
required inflation volume, and the material
of the air bags, there is the possibility of
abrasions or other, potentially more serious
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz
strongly recommends that you inform the
subsequent owner that the vehicle is
equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the
applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
Air bags
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you modify the air bag covers or affix objects
such as stickers to them, the air bags may not
function correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Never modify the air bag covers or affix
objects to them.
G WARNING
Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
even prevent deployment of the air bags
integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the
function of the air bag deactivation system
could be restricted. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
G WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after the airbag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have the
deployed air bags replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as possible.
G WARNING
Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence
of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:
Rfrontal
impacts (driver's and frontpassenger front air bags and knee bags)
Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window
curtain air bags and pelvis air bags)
Rrollover (window curtain air bags)
However, no system available today can
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
When the air bags are deployed, a small
amount of powder is released. The powder
generally does not constitute a health hazard
and does not indicate that there is a fire in the
vehicle. In order to prevent potential
breathing difficulties, you should leave the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
door.
G WARNING
In order to reduce the potential danger of
injuries caused during the deployment of the
front air bags, the driver and front passenger
must always be correctly seated and wear
their seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision, you must always be in the normal
seat position with your back against the
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure
that it is correctly positioned on your body.
As the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating position
and correct positioning of the hands on the
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and
in a position that is as upright as possible
with your back against the backrest.
Rmove the driver's seat as far back as
possible, still permitting proper operation
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver's chest to the center of
the air bag cover on the steering wheel
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You
should be able to accomplish this by
adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
you have any difficulties, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the
steering wheel or dashboard.
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
Placing hands and arms inside the rim can
increase the risk and potential severity of
hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag
inflates.
Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back
as possible from the dashboard when the
seat is occupied.
Roccupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their heads
in the area of the door where the side
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious or fatal injuries should the side
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized
infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
Z
43
Safety
Occupant safety
44
Occupant safety
Safety
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you
make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator's Manual.
If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
affect your hearing. The powder that is
released generally does not constitute a
health hazard and does not indicate that there
is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
You can also open the window to allow fresh
air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up.
The air bag installation locations are
identified by the AIR BAG symbol.
The air bags are deployed if the air bag control
unit detects the need for deployment. Only in
the event of such a situation will the air bags
provide their supplemental protection.
If the driver and front passenger do not wear
their seat belts, it is not possible for the air
bags to provide their supplemental
protection.
In the event of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The
driver and passenger will then be protected
to the extent possible by a properly fastened
seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
Air bags provide additional protection; they
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat
belts regardless of whether your vehicle is
equipped with air bags or not.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air
bags continue to perform their protective
function for the vehicle occupants in the
event of a crash.
i After an air bag has been deployed, have
the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop, even if your vehicle is
ready to drive.
Front air bags
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel; front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
box.
The front air bags increase protection for the
driver's and front passenger's head and
chest.
They are deployed:
Rat
the start of an accident with a high rate
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
longitudinal direction
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
Rif the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being
used
Rindependently of other air bags in the
vehicle
If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are
generally not deployed.
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
bags. The air bag control unit evaluates
vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the
event of a collision. In the first deployment
stage, the front air bag is filled with part of the
total available propellant gas, thereby
reducing the risk of injury. If the air bag
control unit recognizes within a few
milliseconds that the vehicle is being braked
or accelerated faster than originally
predicted, the front air bag is filled with the
maximum amount of propellant gas available.
The deployment of the front-passenger front
air bag is also influenced by the weight
category of the front passenger, which is
determined by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS) (Y page 47).
The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
(predicted at the start of the impact) for
second-stage inflation of the front-passenger
front air bag. In the second stage, the front
air bags are inflated with the maximum
amount of propellant gas available.
The front air bags are not deployed in
situations where a low impact severity is
predicted. You will then be protected by the
fastened seat belt.
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Rthe
system, based on the OCS weight
sensor readings, detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp on the center console is not lit
(Y page 47)
Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high
impact severity
Knee bags
Driver's knee bag : deploys underneath the
steering column and front-passenger knee
bag ; underneath the glove box. They
deploy together with the front air bags. They
are designed to operate together with the
front air bags in frontal impacts if certain
thresholds are exceeded. The knee bags
operate at best in conjunction with correctly
positioned and fastened seat belts.
Knee bags provide increased protection for
the driver and front passenger against the risk
of:
Rknee
injuries
injuries
Rlower leg injuries
Rthigh
Side impact air bags
G WARNING
Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
even prevent deployment of the air bags
integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the
function of the air bag deactivation system
could be restricted. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
G WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not
performed correctly to the doors or door
paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead
to the function of the sensors being impaired.
The air bags might therefore not function
properly any more. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Z
45
Safety
Occupant safety
Safety
46
Occupant safety
You should only use seat cover that have been
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
The seat covers must have a special tear
seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise, the
side impact air bags cannot deploy correctly
and therefore cannot provide the intended
protection in the event of an accident.
Side impact air bags will not deploy in side
impacts which do not exceed the system's
preset deployment thresholds for lateral
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belt.
The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side is not deployed in the
following situations:
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
front-passenger seat belt is not
fastened.
The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side will deploy if the frontpassenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Rthe
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
seat cushions.
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer
additional protection for the thorax of the
vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle
on which the impact occurs. However, they
do not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Pelvis air bags
G WARNING
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat
coverings can cause a malfunction of the side
impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
Rarms
The side impact air bags are deployed:
Ron
the side on which an impact occurs
the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air
bags are generally not deployed. Side impact
air bags are deployed if the system detects
high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a
lateral direction and determines that side
impact air bag deployment can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt.
Rat
Pelvis air bags : enhance the level of
protection of the vehicle occupants on the
side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.
The pelvis air bags deploy next to and below
the outer seat cushions. They are deployed:
Ron
the side on which an impact occurs
the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
If the vehicle rolls over, the pelvis air bags are
generally not deployed. Exception: if the
system detects high vehicle deceleration or
acceleration in a lateral direction and
determines that deployment can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt.
Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in side
impacts which do not exceed the system's
preset deployment thresholds for lateral
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belt.
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
is not deployed in the following situations:
Rat
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
front-passenger seat belt is not
fastened.
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is
fastened, regardless of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not.
Rthe
Window curtain air bags
Window curtain air bags : enhance the level
of protection for the head, but not chest or
arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of
the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
The window curtain air bags are integrated
into the side of the roof frame and deploy in
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
Window curtain air bags are deployed:
Rat
the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in
the event of a vehicle rollover and if the
system determines that air bag deployment
can offer the vehicle occupants additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied
Rindependently of the front air bags
Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in
the event of impacts which do not exceed the
system's preset deployment thresholds for
vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will
then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Method of operation
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates
when an adult or someone larger than a small
individual is in the front-passenger seat, have
the front passenger reposition himself or
herself in the seat until the 45
indicator lamp goes out.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front-passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS has classified
the front-passenger seat occupant as
weighing as much as or less than a typical 12month-old child in a standard child restraint
Z
47
Safety
Occupant safety
Safety
48
Occupant safety
or if the front-passenger seat is classified as
being empty.
When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty,
the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as
being heavier than the weight of a typical 12month-old child seated in a standard child
restraint or as being a small individual (such
as a young teenager or a small adult), the
45 indicator lamp will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
started and then, depending on occupant
weight sensor readings from the frontpassenger seat, remain illuminated or go out.
With the 45 indicator lamp
illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag
is deactivated. With the 45 indicator
lamp out, the front-passenger front air bag is
activated.
When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as an
adult or someone larger than a small
individual, the 45 indicator lamp will
illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when
the engine is started and then go out,
indicating that the front-passenger front air
bag is activated.
If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
the front-passenger front air bag and the
front-passenger knee bag are deactivated and
will not be deployed.
If the 45 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag
and the front-passenger knee bag are
activated and will be deployed:
Rin
the event of certain frontal impacts
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Rindependently of the side impact air bag or
pelvis air bag
If the front-passenger front air bag is
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
influenced by:
Rif
Rthe
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
assessed by the air bag control unit
Rthe front passenger's weight category as
identified by OCS
G WARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seats whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
belt and Top Tether strap, or lower LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child seat retaining loops and
Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with the
infant or child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag.
Occupant safety
RYour
vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the
front-passenger front air bag and the frontpassenger knee bag in your vehicle when
the system senses the weight of a typical
12-month-old child or less along with the
weight of a standard appropriate child
restraint on the front-passenger seat.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front-passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front-passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate
this risk completely is never to place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in the frontpassenger seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear
seat.
RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on
the front-passenger seat, make sure the
45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
indicating that the front-passenger front air
bag and front-passenger knee bag are
deactivated. Should the 45
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
the restraint is installed, please check
installation. Periodically check the
45 indicator lamp while driving to
make sure that the 45 indicator
lamp is illuminated. If the 45
indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do
not transport a child on the front-passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front-passenger seat could be seriously
injured or even killed if the front-passenger
front air bag is deployed.
RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
restraint on the front-passenger seat:
- move the seat as far back as possible
- use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and
weight of the child
- secure child restraint with the vehicle's
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions
RFor children larger than the typical 12month-old child, the front-passenger front
air bag and the front-passenger knee bag
may or may not be activated.
G WARNING
If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and the 45
indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the
OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger
front air bag and the front passenger knee bag
will be deactivated in this case. Have the
system checked by qualified technicians as
soon as possible. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
In order to ensure proper operation of the air
bag system and OCS:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with
your back against the seat backrest.
RWhen seated, a passenger should not
position him/herself in such a way as to
cause the passenger's weight to be lifted
from the seat cushion as this may result in
the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the passenger's weight
category.
RRead and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Z
Safety
Note the following important information if it
is necessary to carry a child on the frontpassenger seat:
49
Occupant safety
Safety
50
If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock or is in position 0, PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp : does not light up.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
categorizes the occupant on the frontpassenger seat using a weight sensor. The
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated
automatically for certain weight categories.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
shows you the current status.
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
categories the occupant on the frontpassenger seat using a weight sensor.
The front-passenger front air bag and the
front-passenger knee bag are deactivated
automatically for certain weight categories.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
shows you the current status.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp lights up, the front-passenger front air
bag and the front-passenger knee bag are
disabled.
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe
side impact air bag
pelvis air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rthe
Rwith
the seat belt fastened correctly
Rin a position that is as upright as possible
with their back against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet on the floor
The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if
the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by
leaning on the armrest.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushion are damaged, have the
necessary repair work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use seat
accessories that have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Both the driver and the front passenger
should always observe the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of
whether or not the front passenger is
positioned correctly. Observe also the air bag
display messages that can be displayed in the
instrument cluster (Y page 244).
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag
will also deploy.
The OCS may have detected that the seat:
Ris
empty or occupied by the weight of a
typical child up to twelve months old,
seated in a child restraint system
Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a
young teenager or a small adult
Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint
system whose weight is greater than that
of a typical twelve month old child.
These are examples of when the OCS
deactivates the front-passenger front air bag
and front-passenger knee bag. Deactivation
takes place although the collision fulfills the
criteria for deploying the driver's air bag.
For further information, see "Air bag display
messages" (Y page 244).
System self-test
G WARNING
If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Occupant safety
51
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.
G WARNING
Safety
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect the
function of the OCS. This could result in the
front-passenger front air bag not functioning
as intended during an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. Make
sure that the bottom and back of the child
restraint system make full contact with the
front-passenger seat cushion and backrest.
Always comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up:
Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock
to position 1 or 2
you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop
button once or twice on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO
Rif an adult is seated properly on the frontpassenger seat and the OCS classifies the
occupant as an adult
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp goes out again after approximately six
seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the OCS
system detects that the front-passenger
seat is empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp will continue to light up.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp will not go out.
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 52).
Rif
Z
52
Occupant safety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System
Safety
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical
adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not
allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger
seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator
lights up and remains
on.
The person on the
front-passenger seat:
The COS is malfunctioning.
X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, upright
position.
X Have the COS checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display (Y page 244).
Rhas
the weight of a
typical adult
Rhas been determined
by the system not to
be a child
Occupant safety
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator
lamp does not light up
and/or does not stay
on.
The front-passenger
seat is:
The COS is malfunctioning.
X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
child seat.
X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint
system rest on the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust
the position of the front-passenger seat.
X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
Runoccupied
seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the frontRoccupied with the
passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt
being pulled too tightly.
weight of a child up
to twelve months old X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
in a child restraint
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
system
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, have
the COS checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat
until the COS has been repaired.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display (Y page 244).
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECKPRO luxury head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The function of the head restraint may be
impaired if you:
Rattach
objects such as coat hangers to the
head restraints, for example
Ruse head restraint covers
If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill
their intended protective function in the event
of an accident. In addition, objects attached
to the head restraints could endanger other
vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Do not attach any objects to the head
restraints and do not use head restraint
covers.
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
head restraints increase protection of the
driver's and front-passenger's head and
neck. In the event of a rear collision of a
certain severity, the NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
on the driver's and the front-passenger seats
are moved forwards and upwards. This
provides better head support.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints have been triggered in
an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
on the driver's and front-passenger seats
(Y page 54). Otherwise, the additional
protection will not be available in the event of
another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
that have been triggered are moved forwards
and can no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints checked at a qualified
specialist workshop after a rear-end collision.
Z
Safety
Problem
53
Occupant safety
54
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
restraints
Safety
NECK-PRO head restraints
NECK-PRO head restraints
Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion forwards in the direction of
arrow :.
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down in the direction of arrow ; as far as
it will go.
X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECKPRO head restraint cushion backwards in
the direction of arrow = until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO head restraint.
X
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
restraint and the rear cover of the head
restraint.
X Push resetting tool : downwards until you
hear the head restraint deployment
mechanism engage.
X Pull out resetting tool :.
X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECKPRO luxury head restraint cushion
backwards in the direction of arrow = until
it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle
document wallet.
i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-
PRO luxury head restraints, have this work
carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection system)
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to
protect occupants in certain hazardous
situations. Despite your vehicle being
equipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, the
possibility of personal injuries occurring as a
result of an accident cannot be eliminated.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the
prevailing road and weather conditions and
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front. Drive carefully.
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rif
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle
document wallet.
X Slide resetting tool : into guide ;
between the NECK-PRO luxury head
X
BAS intervenes, e.g. in emergency
braking situations.
Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully — on
vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.
Rif,
on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the
radar sensor system detects an imminent
danger of collision in certain situations.
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when
physical limits are exceeded and the
vehicle understeers or oversteers severely.
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation
detected:
of an accident, you could slide underneath the
seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
injuries, for example. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in the upright position.
Rthe
Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:
Rthe
Rthey
front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is
in an unfavorable position.
Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or active
multicontour seat: the air pressure in the
side bolsters of the seat cushion and
backrest is increased.
Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and
the side windows are closed so that only a
small gap remains.
If the hazardous situation passes without
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
the belt pre-tensioning. The air pressure in
the side bolsters on the multicontour seat/
active multicontour seat is reduced again. All
settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be
reversed.
If the seat belts are not released:
X
When the vehicle is stationary, move the
backrest or seat back slightly.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
the locking mechanism is released.
Information about seat belt adjustment, a
convenience function integrated into PRESAFE®, can be found in the "Seat belt
adjustment" section (Y page 57).
Seat belts
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if the backrest is not in the
upright position. When braking or in the event
G WARNING
are damaged, extremely dirty,
bleached or dyed
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or the
belt anchorage has been modified.
Damage caused to seat belts in an accident
may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.
Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or
fail, for example in the event of an accident.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may
be deployed unintentionally or fail to be
deployed when required. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Never modify seat belts, Emergency
Tensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages and
inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not
damaged or worn and are clean.
Only use seat belts that have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall
50 states
U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
their seat belts before starting the journey.
Rthe
i See "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 60) for further information on
infants and children traveling in the vehicle
as well as on child restraint systems.
Z
55
Safety
Occupant safety
56
Occupant safety
Correct use of the seat belts
G WARNING
Safety
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
RSeat
belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
that could result in serious injuries in the
event of an accident.
REach occupant should wear their seat belt
at all times, because seat belts help reduce
the likelihood of and potential severity of
injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
The integrated restraint system includes
SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee
bag, front-passenger front air bag, side
impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window
curtain air bags for the side windows),
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt
force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side
(side impact air bags, window curtain air
bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds and in
certain rollovers (window curtain air bags
and ETDs).
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.
In a frontal crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
belt would also apply too much force to the
ribs or abdomen, which could severely
injure internal organs such as your liver or
spleen.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
this purpose, you can adjust the height of
the seat belt outlet.
RPosition
the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
a crash.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
these might cause injuries.
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
RNever use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects at the same time.
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of
the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted seat belt against your body
could cause injuries.
RPregnant women should also always use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible on
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
as upright as possible.
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
sure it is properly positioned.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
Fastening seat belts
G WARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
Occupant safety
If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
appropriate height (Y page 58).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
X
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found
under "Special seat belt retractor"
(Y page 63).
For more information about releasing the seat
belt with release button ?, see "Releasing
seat belts" (Y page 58).
Seat belt adjustment
The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
Ryou
Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
an almost vertical position (Y page 98).
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt
sash guide :.
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder
section of the seat belt across the middle
of your shoulder and the lap section across
your pelvis.
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the
driver's and front-passenger seat belts
automatically adjust to the upper body
(Y page 57).
X
engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock and you then engage the belt tongue
in the buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a
retraction force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt
adjustment on and off in the on-board
computer (Y page 233).
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant
protection)" (Y page 54).
Z
Safety
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriately sized
child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see the
"Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
57
58
Occupant safety
Safety
Belt height adjustment
You can adjust the seat belt height on the
front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that
allows the upper part of the seat belt to be
routed across the center of your shoulder.
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various
positions.
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide
release :.
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.
X Release belt sash guide release : and
make sure that the belt sash guide has
engaged.
Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
the door trim panel and the seat belt.
Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill
their protective function and must be
replaced. Visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
X
X
Press release button ? on belt buckle =.
Guide belt tongue ; to belt sash
guide :.
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
Regardless of whether the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts have already been
fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
lights up for six seconds each time the engine
is started. It then goes out if the driver and
the front passenger have already fastened
their seat belts.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
a maximum of six seconds or once the
driver's seat belt is fastened.
If after six seconds, the driver or front
passenger have not fastened their seat belts
and the doors are closed:
Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains lit
as long as the driver's or front-passenger's
seat belt is not fastened
and
Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is
exceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
begins to flash. A warning tone also sounds
with increasing intensity for a maximum of
Occupant safety
Rboth
the driver and the front passenger
have fastened their seat belts.
or
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.
i For more information on the 7 seat
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
seat belts" (Y page 265).
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat
belt force limiters
G WARNING
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer
operational and are unable to perform their
intended protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency
Tensioning Devices which have been
triggered immediately replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! If the front-passenger seat is not
occupied, do not engage the seat belt
tongue in the buckle on the frontpassenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
Tensioning Device could be triggered in the
event of an accident.
i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: Emergency
Tensioning Devices that are triggered by an
electric motor can be deployed as often as
desired and do not need to be replaced.
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
in the rear are equipped with Emergency
Tensioning Devices and seat belt force
limiters.
The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,
pulling them close against the body.
The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.
The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back
towards the backrest.
The ETDs can only be activated when:
Rthe
ignition is switched on
restraint systems are operational; see
"SRS warning lamp 6" (Y page 41)
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
each of the front seat belts.
The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear
compartment are triggered independently of
the lock status of the seat belts.
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type
and severity of an accident:
Rthe
Rif,
in the event of a head-on or rear-end
collision, the vehicle decelerates or
accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal
direction during the initial stages of the
impact
Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side
opposite the impact the vehicle
decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a
lateral direction
Rif, in certain situations where the vehicle
rolls over, the system determines that it
can provide additional protection
If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,
and a small amount of powder may also be
released. Only in rare cases will the bang
affect your hearing. The powder that is
released generally does not constitute a
Z
Safety
60 seconds or until the driver or front
passenger have fastened their seat belts.
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a
warning tone sounds again.
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or
front-passenger seat belt has still not been
fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt
warning lamp stops flashing but remains
illuminated.
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the
warning tone is reactivated and the seat belt
warning lamp 7 flashes again if the vehicle
speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes
out if:
59
Safety
60
Children in the vehicle
health hazard and does not indicate that there
is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
You can also open the window to allow fresh
air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up.
If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat
belt force limiter and this is triggered, the
force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle
occupant is reduced.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
are synchronized with the front air bags,
which take on a part of the deceleration force.
This results in the force exerted on the
occupant being distributed over a greater
area.
Children in the vehicle
Child restraint systems
Important safety notes
G WARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
RYour
vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the front passenger seat.
RFor children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be activated.
Always make sure the 4 5 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
RIf you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure the 4 5 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 4 5 indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the 4
5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
4 5 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on the
Children in the vehicle
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed
incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot
protect as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions and the notes on use. Please
ensure, that the base of the child restraint
system is always resting completely on the
seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g.
cushions, under or behind the child restraint
system. Only use child restraint systems with
the original cover designed for them. Only
replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed
incorrectly or is not secured, it can come
loose in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or a sudden change in direction. The
child restraint system could be thrown about,
striking vehicle occupants. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems
properly, even if they are not being used.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing
systems which have been damaged or
subjected to a load in an accident can no
longer protect as intended. The child cannot
then be restrained in the event of an accident,
heavy braking or sudden changes of direction.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
even fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the
securing systems on the child restraint
system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop, before you install a child restraint
system again.
G WARNING
Infants and small children should never share
a seat belt with another occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Children that are too large for a child restraint
must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
Position the shoulder belt across the chest
and shoulder, not the face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat
belt positioning for children over 41 lbs
(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/
shoulder belt fits properly without a booster
seat.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an
accident.
Z
Safety
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle's seat belt according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
61
62
Children in the vehicle
G WARNING
If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
RSecure
Safety
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot.
Children may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the
child restraint system has been exposed to
direct sunlight, let it cool down before
securing the child in it. Never leave children
unattended in the vehicle.
the child with a child or infant seat
restraint system appropriate to the age and
weight of the child.
RMake sure that the infant or child is
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always
properly secure all infants and children with
a child or infant seat restraint system for the
trip.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall
50 states
U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Infants and children must always be seated in
an appropriate infant or child restraint system
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. The infant or child restraint system
must be properly secured in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
All infant or child restraint systems must meet
the following standards:
Rthe
RU.S.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
corresponds to the standards can be found
on an instruction label on the child restraint
system. This confirmation can also be found
in the installation instructions that are
included with the child restraint system.
Always read and follow the manufacturer's
instructions when using an infant or child
restraint system or booster seat.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
interior or on the infant or child restraint.
Children in the vehicle
G WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt
retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws
in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt
cannot be immediately refastened. There is
an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and
secure the child restraint system properly.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When activated, the special seat belt
retractor ensures that the seat belt will not
slacken once the child restraint system has
been secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors
in the rear
G WARNING
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
(22 kg). The child could, for example, not be
restrained correctly in the event of an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
also secure the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with the vehicle seat belt.
Also secure the child restraint system with the
Top Tether belt, if available.
When installing a child restraint system, be
sure to observe the manufacturer's
installation instructions and the instructions
for correct use of the child restraint system.
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat
belt retractor.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
buckle.
X
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat
belt retractor retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
belt retractor is activated.
X Push down on the child restraint system to
take up any slack.
X
Removing a child restraint system/
deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
X Press the seat belt release button and
guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.
The special seat belt retractor is
deactivated.
X
Securing ring
When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system, fold protective caps ; of
securing rings : inwards.
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
securing system. Comply with the
manufacturer's instructions when
installing.
The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system is a
standardized securing system for specially
designed child restraint systems on the rear
seats. Securing rings for two LATCH-type
(ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed
on the left and right of the rear seats.
Z
Safety
Special seat belt retractor
63
Safety
64
Children in the vehicle
Secure child restraint systems without a
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system using the seat belts in the vehicle.
When installing child restraint systems, you
must observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Top Tether
Top Tether anchorages
G WARNING
Always lock the rear seat backrests in their
upright position when the rear seats are
occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat
backrests in their upright position before
installing the Top Tether straps or when the
cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure
that rear seat backrests are secured properly
by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.
If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the
seat backrest could fold forward. The child
restraint system is no longer supported
properly or held in position and can no longer
fulfill its function. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries.
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between a child restraint system, secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,
and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk
of injury even further.
The Top Tether anchorage points are located
in the rear compartment behind the head
restraints.
X Move head restraint : upwards.
X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
=.
X Route Top Tether belt A under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
anchorage =.
X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not
twisted.
X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether
anchorage =.
X Slide down head restraint : until it
engages (Y page 101).
Make sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt A.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Comply
with the manufacturer's installation
instructions when doing so. Make sure that
Top Tether belt A is tight.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Children in the vehicle
Rrelease
the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
G WARNING
Children could open a rear door from inside
the vehicle. This could result in serious
injuries or an accident. Therefore, when
children ride in the rear always secure the rear
doors with the child-proof locks.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could:
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
or road users
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
traffic
Roperate
vehicle equipment and become
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
You can activate the following child-proof
locks:
Rrear
Rrear
doors (Y page 65)
side windows (Y page 65)
You secure each door individually with the
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
from the outside.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock
lever up in the direction of arrow :.
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side
windows
G WARNING
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,
activate the override switch. Otherwise, the
children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
themselves in the rear side window.
Z
Safety
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
65
Driving safety systems
66
Safety
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
good time. Always adapt your driving style to
suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic
conditions and maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
i The driving safety systems described only
X
To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
only possible using the switches in the
driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off,
operation is possible using the switches in
the rear compartment.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS
(Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 66)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67)
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)
(Y page 67)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 68)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 71)
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or
become distracted, the driving safety
systems can neither reduce the risk of
accident nor override the laws of physics.
Driving safety systems are merely aids
designed to assist driving. You are
work as effectively as possible when there
is adequate contact between the tires and
the road surface. Please pay special
attention to the notes on tires,
recommended minimum tire tread depths,
etc. (Y page 334).
In wintry driving conditions, always use
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,
snow chains. Only in this way will the
driving safety systems described in this
section work as effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 66).
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired.
Additionally, further driving safety systems
are deactivated. There is an increased danger
of skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 267) and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 238).
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the
vehicle when braking.
Driving safety systems
Braking
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking
situation is over.
X To make a full brake application:
depress the brake pedal with full force.
X
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions, and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 66).
G WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
BAS operates in emergency braking
situations. If you depress the brake pedal
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking
force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS)
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 66).
BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles
equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
radar sensor system must be:
Ractivated (Y
page 232)
Roperational
With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS
PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the
path of your vehicle for an extended period of
time.
If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,
BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake
system is still available with complete brake
boosting effect and BAS.
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in
hazardous situations at speeds greater than
4 mph (7 km/h).
At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to
stationary objects. Examples of stationary
objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
objects and complex traffic situations. BAS
PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There
is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
G WARNING
BAS PLUS does not react:
Rto
people or animals
oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
Rto
Z
Safety
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface
conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,
even if you only brake gently.
The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition
is switched on. It goes out when the engine is
running.
67
Safety
68
Driving safety systems
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
critical situations. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if there is:
Rdirt
on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
specialist workshop. This also applies to
collisions at low speeds where there is no
visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Braking assistance
To prevent a collision with the vehicle in front,
BAS PLUS calculates the brake force
necessary if:
Ryou
approach an obstacle, and
PLUS has detected a risk of collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake
pressure will be carried out at the last
possible moment.
When driving at a speed greater than
20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake
pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises
the brake pressure to a value adapted to the
traffic situation.
If BAS PLUS demands particularly high
braking force, preventative passenger
RBAS
protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are
activated simultaneously.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes
function as usual if:
Ryou
release the brake pedal
is no longer a risk of collision
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicle
Rthere
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 66).
G WARNING
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further
driving safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the
ignition when the parking brake is being
tested on a brake dynamometer.
Application of the brakes by ESP® may
otherwise destroy the brake system.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes
on ESP®(Y page 330) when towing the
vehicle with a raised rear axle.
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up
continuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 269) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 238).
Driving safety systems
If ESP® intervenes:
Do not deactivate ESP® under any
circumstances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far
as necessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
X
i Only use wheels with the recommended
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
properly.
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels
individually if they spin. This enables you to
pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,
for example if the road surface is slippery on
one side. In addition, more drive torque is
transferred to the wheel or wheels with
traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP®.
Deactivating/activating ESP® (except
AMG vehicles)
G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased
risk of skidding and an accident.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
X
To deactivate:(Y page 227).
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X
To activate: (Y page 227).
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
ESP® is activated automatically when the
engine is started.
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
stops moving. The engine starts
automatically when the driver wants to pull
away again. ESP® remains in its previously
selected status. Example: if ESP® was
deactivated before the engine was switched
off, ESP® remains deactivated when the
engine is switched on again.
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
following situations:
Rwhen
using snow chains
deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
If you deactivate ESP®:
Rin
RESP®
no longer improves driving stability.
control is still activated.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
Rengine torque is not limited and the drive
wheels are able to spin. The spinning
wheels produce a cutting effect for better
traction.
Rtraction
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
described in the following.
Z
Safety
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
keep the vehicle on the desired course within
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
69
Driving safety systems
70
Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG
vehicles)
Safety
Activating/deactivating SPORT handling
mode
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and
accidents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the
situations described in the following.
It may be best to activate SPORT handling
mode in the following situations:
Rwhen
using snow chains
deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a
limited degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
Rin
RESP®
To activate: briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The SPORT handling mode message
appears in the multifunction display.
SPORT handling mode is designed for
driving on designated roads when the
vehicle's own oversteering and
understeering characteristics are desired.
Driving in SPORT handling mode requires
an extremely qualified and experienced
driver who is able to cope with these critical
driving conditions.
X To deactivate: briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
ESP®
is activated automatically when the
engine is started.
only improves driving stability to a
limited degree.
Rtraction control is still activated.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
Rengine torque is only restricted to a limited
degree, and the drive wheels are able to
spin. The spinning wheels produce a
cutting effect for better traction.
Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the
ECO start/stop function switches the engine
off automatically when the vehicle comes to
a stop. The engine starts automatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
remains in its previously selected status. For
example, if ESP® was deactivated before the
engine was switched off, ESP® remains
deactivated when the engine is switched on
again.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased
risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
described in the following.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Driving safety systems
71
X
To deactivate: press button : until the
å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster.
The ÷OFF message appears in the
multifunction display.
Deactivate ESP® when driving on
designated roads when the vehicle's own
oversteering and understeering
characteristics are desired. Driving without
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and
experienced driver who is able to cope with
these critical driving conditions.
X
To activate: briefly press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON
message appears in the multifunction
display.
ESP® is activated automatically when the
engine is started.
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
following situations:
Rwhen
using snow chains
deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
If you deactivate ESP®:
Rin
RESP®
no longer improves driving stability.
control is still activated.
Rtraction
is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
intervenes.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it
is also not activated if you brake firmly and
ESP® intervenes.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning
wheels produce a cutting effect for better
traction.
Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the
ECO start/stop function switches the engine
off automatically when the vehicle comes to
a stop. The engine starts automatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
remains in its previously selected status. For
example, if ESP® was deactivated before the
engine was switched off, ESP® remains
deactivated when the engine is switched on
again.
EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 66).
G WARNING
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 267) as well as
display messages (Y page 240).
EBD monitors and controls the brake
pressure on the rear wheels to improve
driving stability while braking.
Z
Safety
RPRE-SAFE®
72
Driving safety systems
Safety
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
and offers increased braking comfort. In
addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE
BRAKE also has the HOLD function
(Y page 186) and hill start assist
(Y page 150).
PRE-SAFE® Brake
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 66).
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
If PRE-SAFE® Brake is to aid you, the radar
sensor system must be:
Ractivated (Y
page 232)
Roperational
With the help of the radar sensor system,
PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that
are in front of your vehicle for an extended
period of time.
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or
reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRESAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,
you will be warned visually and acoustically
as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®
Brake cannot prevent a collision without your
intervention.
At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect
stationary objects. Examples of stationary
objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE®
Brake will initially brake your
vehicle by a partial application of the brakes
if a danger of collision is detected. There may
be a collision unless you also brake.
Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent
a collision. There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action.
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic
conditions.
In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if there is:
Rdirt
on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
Rto
people or animals
oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
Rto
As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
give warnings nor intervene in all critical
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
Theft deterrent locking system
Function
X
To activate/deactivate: activate or
deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the onboard computer (Y page 228).
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction
display.
If you approach a vehicle in front very quickly,
this function warns you from a speed of
approximately 4 mph (7 km/h). An
intermittent warning tone sounds and the
· distance warning signal lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
From a speed of approximately 4 mph
(7 km/h), if the driver and front passenger
have fastened their seat belts, PRE-SAFE®
Brake can brake the vehicle automatically at
speeds up to approximately 124 mph
(200 km/h).
You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by:
Rdepressing
the accelerator pedal further.
kickdown.
Rreleasing the brake pedal.
Ractivating
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
ended automatically if:
Ryou
maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
is no longer any danger of a rear-end
collision.
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
front of your vehicle.
If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE®
Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system
will alert you both visually and acoustically. If
you do not brake or take evasive action, the
system will warn you by automatically braking
the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk
of collision, preventative passenger
protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are
activated (Y page 54). If a risk of collision
remains at speeds of over 20 mph
(30 km/h) and you do not brake, take evasive
action or significantly accelerate, automatic
braking may be performed up to and including
emergency braking. Automatic emergency
braking is not performed until immediately
prior to an accident that can no longer be
avoided.
Rthere
Theft deterrent locking system
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Anyone can start the engine if a valid
SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started when the starter battery is fully
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
Z
Safety
In order to maintain the appropriate distance
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a
collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated driving conditions may cause
unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary
intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake.
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
specialist workshop. This also applies to
collisions at low speeds where there is no
visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
73
Theft deterrent locking system
74
Safety
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
X
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the
dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside
the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm stays on for more than
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm
system is armed after approximately
15 seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
X
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra
door
vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe hood
X To turn the alarm off with the
SmartKey: press the % or & button
on the SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
Rthe
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically sends a message to
the Customer Assistance Center by text
message or data connection. The
emergency call system sends the message
provided that:
Ryou
have subscribed to the mbrace
service
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available
75
76
76
82
84
88
92
Opening and closing
Useful information ..............................
SmartKey .............................................
Doors ....................................................
Trunk ....................................................
Side windows ......................................
Sliding sunroof ....................................
76
SmartKey
Useful information
Opening and closing
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
G WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be
unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This
could cause the engine to be switched off.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
before inserting the SmartKey into the
ignition lock.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
SmartKey
Important safety notes
RDo
not keep the SmartKey:
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey
- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil
- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
This can affect the functionality of the
SmartKey.
-
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
SmartKey functions
Rrelease
Rshifting
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
: & To lock the vehicle
; F To unlock the trunk lid
= % To unlock the vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press the %
button.
SmartKey
Rthe
vehicle is locked again.
theft deterrent locking system is
armed again.
Rthe
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe
doors
trunk lid
Rthe fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 232).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 231).
KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid
SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically
establishing a radio connection between the
vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens:
Rwhen
the external door handles are
touched
Rwhen starting the engine
Rwhile the vehicle is in motion
Opening and closing
If you do not open the vehicle within
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
Rthe
Bear in mind that the engine can be started
by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor
surface :.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an
extended period.
X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on
the trunk lid.
Locking/unlocking centrally
Further information on the convenience
closing feature (Y page 90).
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a
conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle
by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock
it using the & button on the SmartKey.
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,
the distance between the SmartKey and the
corresponding door handle must not be
greater than 3 ft (1 m).
77
X
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking
system. This means that only the driver's door
and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you
frequently travel on your own.
X To change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons on the
SmartKey simultaneously for
Z
SmartKey
78
approximately six seconds until the battery
check lamp flashes twice (Y page 79).
i If the setting of the locking system is
changed within the signal range of the
vehicle, pressing the & or % button:
Opening and closing
Rlocks
or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the %
button twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X
or
X
To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X
X
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as
follows:
To turn the alarm off with the
SmartKey: press the % or & button
on the SmartKey.
To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the
ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
or
X
Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey must be outside the
vehicle.
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
automatically.
X
To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
flashes twice (Y page 79).
Mechanical key
General notes
: Release catch
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the
mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
anti-theft alarm system will be triggered
(Y page 74).
; Mechanical key
X
Push release catch : in the direction of
the arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive
substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
result in severe health problems. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
X
Opening and closing
SmartKey battery
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Checking the battery
: Battery compartment cover
; Mechanical key
Press mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. Do not hold battery compartment
cover : closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
X
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 79).
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
X
Rlocks
or
Runlocks
the vehicle
i You can get a battery at any qualified
specialist workshop.
79
= Battery
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
cloth to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Z
SmartKey
80
Insert the front tabs of battery
compartment cover : into the housing
first and then press to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
Opening and closing
X
SmartKey
81
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You cannot lock or
unlock the vehicle
using the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or
& button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 79).
X Lock (Y page 84) or unlock (Y page 84) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X Lock (Y page 84) or unlock (Y page 84) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
or unlock the vehicle
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
using KEYLESS-GO.
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 79).
X Lock (Y page 84) or unlock (Y page 84) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost a
SmartKey.
X
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Z
Opening and closing
Problems with the SmartKey
Opening and closing
82
Doors
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine cannot be
started using the
SmartKey.
The on-board voltage is too low.
X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 324).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 326).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as
started using KEYLESS- easily.
GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
the vehicle.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors
G WARNING
Important safety notes
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has
been locked with the SmartKey or with
KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 74).
You can only open the rear doors from inside
the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 65).
X
To unlock a front door: pull door
handle ;.
Locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X
To open a front door: pull door
handle ;.
X
To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
You can only open the rear doors from inside
the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 65).
If the vehicle has been locked using the
locking button for the central locking, or has
been locked automatically, and a door is
opened from the inside:
Rthe
vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlocked
Ronly the door which has been opened form
the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked
Automatic locking feature
To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside.
To deactivate: press and hold button :
for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X
i If you press one of the two buttons and
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
X
X
To unlock: press button :.
To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
locked or unlocked.
Z
83
Opening and closing
Doors
Trunk
84
You could therefore lock yourself out if:
Rthe
vehicle is being pushed.
vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board
computer (Y page 232).
Opening and closing
Rthe
Unlocking the driver's door
(mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
Open the driver's door.
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
doors and the trunk lid.
X Press the locking button (Y page 83).
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors
are still visible. Press down the locking
knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 82).
X Close the driver's door.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X
1 To lock
Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far
as it will go to position 1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
are locked.
X Insert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
X
1 To unlock
Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
X
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 74).
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
Trunk
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
Trunk
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is
a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
85
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 379).
X
X
Press the % button on the SmartKey.
Pull handle :.
Closing
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the cargo compartment. Observe the
loading guidelines (Y page 278).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
Vehicles without trunk lid remote closing
feature: the trunk lid can be:
Ropened
and closed manually from outside
automatically from outside
Ropened automatically from inside
Rlocked separately
Runlocked with the mechanical key
Ropened with the emergency release button
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing
feature: the trunk lid can be:
Ropened
Ropened
and closed manually from outside
Ropened and closed automatically from
outside
Ropened and closed automatically from
inside
Rlocked separately
Runlocked with the mechanical key
Ropened with the emergency release button
X
X
Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.
If necessary, lock the vehicle with
the & button on the SmartKey
(Y page 76) or with KEYLESS-GO
(Y page 77).
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and
will open again.
Z
Opening and closing
G WARNING
86
Trunk
Opening/closing automatically from
outside
Important safety notes
Opening and closing
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is
a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
RPress
the F button on the key.
Rpress
the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.
RPress the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
RPull the trunk lid handle.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 379).
Opening
You can open the trunk lid automatically
using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk
lid.
X Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.
or
X If the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
handle and release it again immediately
(Y page 85).
Closing
Example: closing and locking button (vehicle with
the trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESSGO)
: Closing button
; Locking button
X
To close: press closing button : in the
trunk lid.
Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing
feature and KEYLESS-GO: you can
simultaneously close and lock the trunk lid.
X
Press locking button ; in the trunk lid.
i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the
trunk, the trunk lid will not lock.
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the trunk lid.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Opening/closing automatically from
inside
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the trunk lid.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
Trunk
RPress
Opening and closing
the F button on the key.
Rpress
the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.
RPress the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
RPull the trunk lid handle.
G WARNING
The trunk lid can be automatically opened or
closed even if the SmartKey is not in the
vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could activate the functions.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is
a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 379).
To open: pull remote operating switch for
trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.
X To close: press remote operating switch
for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is closed.
X
You can open the trunk lid from the driver's
seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked.
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the
mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
will be triggered (Y page 74).
X Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
Z
Opening and closing
closing area during the closing process. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
87
Side windows
88
Trunk lid emergency release light:
release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
Remergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed
Opening and closing
Remergency
Side windows
Important safety notes
1 Neutral position.
2 To unlock
Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
from position 1 as far as it will go to
position 2.
The trunk is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back to position
1 and remove it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
X
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side
window and the door frame as the side
window moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side
window during the opening procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or pull the switch to close the side
window again.
G WARNING
Trunk emergency release
You can open the trunk lid from inside the
vehicle with the emergency release button.
While opening the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or press the switch to open the side
window again.
G WARNING
X
Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened
with the trunk lid emergency release when
the vehicle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not
open the trunk lid if the battery is
disconnected or discharged.
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
Side windows
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto
soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the side window again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
= Rear right
? Rear left
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To open: press the corresponding switch.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
i If you press the switch beyond the point
of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
X
i You can continue to operate the side
windows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the
driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
i When the override feature for the side
windows is activated (Y page 65), the side
windows cannot be operated from the rear.
Convenience opening
Opening and closing the side
windows
The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take
precedence.
General notes
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
carry out the following functions
simultaneously:
Runlock
the vehicle
the side windows
Ropen the sliding sunroof
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the
driver's seat
Ropen
i The convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the SmartKey. The
SmartKey must be close to the driver's
door handle.
: Front left
; Front right
Z
Opening and closing
blocks or restricts a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing a side window.
89
Side windows
90
Convenience opening
Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle.
X Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof are in
the desired position.
X To interrupt convenience opening:
release the % button.
Opening and closing
X
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
Information on the side window reversing
feature (Y page 88).
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto
soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
Rduring
G WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side window
and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of
injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is
operating. Make sure that no body parts are
in close proximity during the closing
procedure.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
With the SmartKey:
Rrelease
the & button.
Rpress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel open again.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
Rrelease
the sensor surface on the door
handle.
Rpull the door handle immediately and hold
it.
The side windows and the sliding sunroof
or the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel open.
General notes
When you lock the vehicle, you can
simultaneously:
Rclose
Rclose
the side windows
the sliding sunroof
Using the SmartKey
The SmartKey must be close to the driver's
door handle.
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle.
X Press and hold the & button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof are
fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X
To interrupt convenience closing:
release the & button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the
vehicle. All the doors must be closed.
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed
sensor surface :.
X
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X
To interrupt convenience closing:
release recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle.
91
Opening and closing
Side windows
Resetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 89).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side
window is completely closed (Y page 89).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
X
Z
92
Sliding sunroof
Problems with the side windows
Opening and closing
G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
A side window cannot
be closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
A side window cannot
be closed and you
cannot see the cause.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
X
Remove the objects.
Close the side window.
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
G WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing
procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be
stopped.
G WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
may occur.
Sliding sunroof
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
damaged if water enters the vehicle
interior.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
Rduring
Opening and closing
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged.
Operating the sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens
again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto
soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
93
Overhead control panel
: To raise
; To open
= To close/lower
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the
corresponding direction.
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
X
i The automatic opening and raising
feature is available only when the sliding
sunroof is closed.
The sun protection cover automatically opens
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open
or close the sun protection cover manually
when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
i You can continue to operate the sliding
sunroof after switching off the engine or
Z
94
Sliding sunroof
removing the SmartKey from the ignition
lock. This function remains active for five
minutes or until you open a front door.
Resetting
Opening and closing
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
opened or closed fully after resetting,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
(Y page 93).
X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another
second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be
fully opened and closed again (Y page 93).
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Sliding sunroof
95
Problems with the sliding sunroof
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
Rduring
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The sliding sunroof
cannot be closed and
you cannot see the
cause.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X
Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X
Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment
feature.
Z
Opening and closing
G WARNING
96
97
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Useful information .............................. 98
Correct driver's seat position ............ 98
Seats .................................................... 99
Steering wheel .................................. 106
Mirrors ............................................... 109
Memory function .............................. 112
98
Correct driver's seat position
Useful information
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Correct driver's seat position
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
Observe the safety guidelines on seat
adjustment (Y page 99).
X Make sure that seat = is adjusted
properly.
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 100)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
X
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag
as possible.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.
Ryou
can fasten the seat belt properly.
have moved the backrest to an almost
vertical position.
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported.
Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is
adjusted properly.
When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by
the center of the head restraint.
X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 106).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is
adjusted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 106)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou
Ryou
can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 55).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 56).
Seats
Rfit
snugly across your body
Rbe routed across the middle of your
shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip
joints
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a
way that you have a good view of road and
traffic conditions (Y page 109).
X Vehicles with a memory function: save
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings with the memory function
(Y page 112).
Seats
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat
adjustment buttons and become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under
the lever assembly of the seat adjustment
system.
G WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if the backrest is not in the
upright position. When braking or in the event
of an accident, you could slide underneath the
seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
injuries, for example. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in the upright position.
G WARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The seat belt should:
99
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
100
Seats
properly secured in an appropriately sized
child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see the
"Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Adjusting the seats
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
: Head restraint height
Rkeep
; Seat cushion angle
liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see "Interior care".
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,
seat covers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
i The head restraints in the front seats are
installed with the NECK-PRO system
(Y page 53). For this reason, it is not
possible to remove the head restraints
from the front seats.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i Further related subjects:
= Seat height
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A Backrest angle
i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an
unfavorable position.
i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 112).
i Vehicles with the through-loading
feature: if you fold down a rear seat
backrest, the respective front seat is
moved forwards slightly in order to avoid
contact.
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
Seats
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
General notes
Observe the important safety guidelines for
seats (Y page 99).
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front
and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust
the height and angle of the head restraints to
the correct position.
Adjusting the height of the head
restraints electrically
To adjust the side bolsters of the head
restraint: push or pull right or left-hand
side bolster : into the desired position.
X To adjust the angle of the head
restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
the direction of arrow ;.
X
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
Rear seat head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
X
To adjust the head restraint height: slide
switch for head restraint adjustment : up
or down in the direction of the arrow.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
close as possible to your head. This will
reduce the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar
situation.
Whenever the rear seats are occupied, only
drive the vehicle with the head restraints
installed and engaged. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
G WARNING
101
Seats
102
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
angle
To remove: pull the head restraint up to
the stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so
that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
X
Adjusting the multicontour seat
X
Pull or push the top of the head restraint
until it is in the desired position.
The multicontour seat function is only
available for vehicles in Canada.
Removing and installing the rear seat
head restraints
G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
! Make sure that the rear window roller
sunblind has been retracted before the rear
head restraints are removed. You could
otherwise damage the roller sunblind.
: To adjust the thigh cushion
; To adjust the backrest contour in the
lumbar region
= To adjust the backrest contour in the
upper back region
? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
backrest
You can adjust the contour of the front seats
individually so as to provide optimum support
for your back and sides.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
Seats
Overview
: To adjust the seat cushion length
; To switch the dynamic function on or off
= To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
backrest
? To switch the massage function on or off
A To adjust the contour of the backrest to
increase/decrease support
B To adjust the height/depth of the
backrest contour
The active multicontour seat on the driver's
side automatically adapts the sides of the
backrest to your current driving style. You can
adjust the contour of the seat individually so
as to provide optimum support for your back
and sides.
You can select the following levels:
Level 1 (one
indicator lamp)
Standard setting:
slightly increased
lateral support and
slow build-up of air
pressure in the side
bolsters of the seat
backrest.
Level 2 (two
indicator lamps)
Sport setting:
increased lateral
support and fast
build-up of pressure
in the side bolsters
of the seat backrest.
Massage function (PULSE)
The massage function helps you to prevent
muscle tension on long journeys. You can
choose between two levels.
X To switch on: press button ? once or
twice until the desired level is set.
One or two indicator lamps in button ?
light up. The air cushions in the lumbar
region vibrate for approximately
20 minutes.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
Dynamic function
The dynamic function adjusts the air cushions
in the side bolsters of the seat backrests to
ensure ideal lateral support at all times. You
can choose between two levels.
X To switch on: press button ; once or
twice until the desired level is set.
One or two indicator lamps in button ;
light up.
X To switch off: press button ; repeatedly
until all indicator lamps in button ; go out.
: To raise the backrest contour
; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour
? To harden the backrest contour
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjusting the active multicontour
seat
103
104
Seats
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.
Switching the seat heating on/off
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Activating/deactivating
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high
temperatures may be affected or they may
even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk
of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
X
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Seats
105
Problems with the seat heating
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat heating has
switched off
prematurely or cannot
be switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
consumers are switched on.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will
switch back on automatically.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Problem
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Activating/deactivating
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
indicate the ventilation level you have
selected.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 89). The seat
ventilation of the driver's seat
automatically switches to the highest level.
Z
106
Steering wheel
Problems with the seat ventilation
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
switched off
consumers are switched on.
prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
be switched on.
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will
switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
Adjusting the steering wheel
electrically
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
: To adjust the steering wheel height
; To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
i Further related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature
(Y page 108)
RStoring settings (Y page 112)
Steering wheel
107
Steering wheel heating
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,
the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch
off the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
i The steering wheel heating may switch off
temporarily if:
Rthe
temperature in the vehicle interior is
above 86 ‡ (30 †).
Rthe temperature of the steering wheel is
above 95 ‡ (35 †).
Indicator lamp = remains on.
Z
108
Steering wheel
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
If the steering wheel
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
heating indicator lamp consumers are switched on.
is flashing, the steering X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
wheel heating has
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
switched off
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel
automatically.
heating will switch back on automatically.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is
making adjustments, make sure that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the
steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress
one of the memory function position
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel
adjustment in the opposite direction to that
in which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature, they can become trapped,
particularly when unattended. There is a risk
of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
in and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board
computer (Y page 233).
Position of the steering wheel when the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings upwards when
you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;
KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1 in the
ignition lock
Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's
door; the SmartKey must be in position 0
or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 147)
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper end
stop.
Mirrors
The steering wheel is moved to the last
selected position when:
Rthe
driver's door is closed
KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/
Stop button once on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO
or
Rwith the SmartKey: you insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
When you close the driver's door with the
ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
also automatically moved to the previously
set position.
The last position of the steering wheel is
stored when you switch off the ignition or
when you store the setting with the memory
function (Y page 112).
Rwith
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
triggered in an accident, the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is
opened. This occurs irrespective of the
position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and
rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY
feature is activated in the on-board computer.
(Y page 233)
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the
distance from road users traveling behind,
e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an
accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition (Y page 147).
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand
exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
X
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Position of the steering wheel for
driving
109
Mirrors
110
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or
to the left or right until you have adjusted
the exterior mirror to the correct position.
You should have a good overview of traffic
conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
After the engine has been started, the
exterior mirrors are automatically heated if
the rear window defroster is switched on and
the outside temperature is low. Heating takes
a maximum of 10 minutes.
i The exterior mirrors can also be heated
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
Setting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or
completely discharged, the exterior mirrors
must be reset. The exterior mirrors will
otherwise not fold in when you select the
"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the
on-board computer (Y page 233)
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X Briefly press button :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 233):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the
outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again
automatically as soon as you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding
exterior mirrors: press and hold mirrorfolding button : until you hear a click and
then the mirrors engage in position
(Y page 110).
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 109).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition (Y page 147).
X Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
X
i If you are driving faster than 30 mp/h
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the
exterior mirrors.
Mirrors
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into antiglare mode if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
Rthe
ignition is switched on and
light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror.
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior
lighting is switched on.
Rincident
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving
position.
X
Using the memory button
Parking position for the exterior
mirror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
; Button for the front-passenger side
exterior mirror
= Adjustment button
? Memory button M
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
; Button for the front-passenger side
exterior mirror
= Adjustment button
? Memory button M
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. You can store this
position.
X Park the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 147).
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M ?.
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment
button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In
the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the
curb should be visible.
X
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
111
Memory function
112
Press memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X If the exterior mirror moves out of position,
repeat the steps.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
Calling up a stored parking position
setting
Memory function
Storing settings
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they
activate the memory function, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
; Button for the front-passenger side
exterior mirror
= Adjustment button
? Memory button M
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves back to its original position:
X
Ras
soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
Rif you press button : for the exterior
mirror on the driver's side
With the memory function, you can store up
to three different settings, e.g. for three
different people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition
of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Ractive multicontour seat: seat contour,
dynamic function level
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior
mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
Memory function
Adjust the seat (Y page 100).
X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 106) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 109).
X Press memory button M and one of the
storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected
preset position. A tone sounds when the
settings have been completed.
113
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
Calling up a stored setting
Press and hold the relevant storage
position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in
the stored position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
X
Z
114
115
116
116
123
124
125
Lights and windshield wipers
Useful information ............................
Exterior lighting ................................
Interior lighting .................................
Replacing bulbs .................................
Windshield wipers ............................
116
Exterior lighting
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
Lights and windshield wipers
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you drive with the lights
switched on even during the daytime.
Therefore, your vehicle is equipped with
special daytime running lamps. In some
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed
obligations.
If you wish to drive during the daytime without
lights, switch off the daytime running lamps
function in the on-board computer
(Y page 230).
Asymmetrical low beam
Have the headlamps converted back to
asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as
possible after crossing the border again.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
Rthe
light switch
combination switch (Y page 119)
Rthe on-board computer (Y page 230)
Rthe
Light switch
Operation
1W Left-hand standing lamps
2X Right-hand standing lamps
Driving abroad
Symmetrical low-beam headlamps
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low
beam in countries in which traffic drives on
the opposite side of the road from the country
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents
glare to oncoming traffic. When using
symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not
lit as widely and as far ahead as normal.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop as close to the border as
possible before driving in these countries.
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X
Turn the light switch to Ã.
Exterior lighting
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen
the driver's door with the SmartKey
in position 0.
Automatic headlamp mode
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.
1W Left-hand standing lamps
2X Right-hand standing lamps
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
à is the favored light switch setting. The
light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient
light (exception: poor visibility due to weather
conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
RSmartKey
in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
RWith the engine running: if you have
activated the daytime running lamps
function via the on-board computer, the
daytime running lamps or the low-beam
headlamps and parking lamps are switched
on or off automatically depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
X To switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
Only for Canada:
The daytime running lamps improve the
visibility of your vehicle during the day. The
daytime running lamps function is required by
law in Canada. It cannot therefore be
deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in high ambient light: if you
turn the light switch to T, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the
visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do
this, the daytime running lamps function must
be switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 230).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
The exterior lighting (except the parking/
standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
117
118
Exterior lighting
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
Lights and windshield wipers
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Parking lamps
! If the battery has been excessively
discharged, the parking lamps or standing
lamps are automatically switched off to
enable the next engine start. Always park
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
according to legal standards. Avoid the
continuous use of the T parking lamps
for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.
1W Left-hand standing lamps
2X Right-hand standing lamps
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
1W Left-hand standing lamps
2X Right-hand standing lamps
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that
it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
headlamps switch on when the ignition is
switched on and the light switch is set to the
L position. This is a particularly useful
function in the event of rain and fog.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to
T.
The green T indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Exterior lighting
Standing lamps
119
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
X
2X Right-hand standing lamps
High-beam headlamps
Lights and windshield wipers
1W Left-hand standing lamps
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is
illuminated.
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is
in position 0.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam
headlamps are only switched on when it is
dark and the engine is running.
X
Combination switch
Turn signal
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
Z
Exterior lighting
120
Lights and windshield wipers
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the highbeam headlamps are switched on.
X To switch off the high-beam
headlamps: move the combination switch
back to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,
it controls activation of the high-beam
headlamps (Y page 121).
Hazard warning lamps
To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button :.
X
High-beam flasher
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
Ran
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the
engine.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
X
air bag is deployed
vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of more than 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off
automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed
of over 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full
brake application.
Rthe
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off.
Headlamp cleaning system
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is
operated five times (Y page 125) while the
lights are on and the engine is running. When
you switch off the ignition, the automatic
headlamp cleaning system is reset and
counting is resumed from 0.
Exterior lighting
Cornering light function
121
The active light function is a system that
moves the headlamps according to the
steering movements of the front wheels. In
this way, relevant areas remain illuminated
while driving. This allows you to identify
pedestrians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
The cornering light function improves the
illumination of the road over a wide angle in
the direction you are turning, enabling better
visibility in tight bends, for example. It can
only be activated when the low-beam
headlamps are switched on.
Active:
Rif
you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
Rif you are driving at speeds between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
and turn the steering wheel
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn
signal or turn the steering wheel to the
straight-ahead position.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after
no more than three minutes.
G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Rwho
have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
may fail too recognize other road users that
have lights, or may recognize them too late.
In this or similar situations, the automatic
high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated
or activated regardless. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
Rwho
Active light function
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
Important safety notes
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
122
You can use this function to set the
headlamps to change between low beam and
high beam automatically. The system
recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either
approaching from the opposite direction or
traveling in front of your vehicle, and
consequently switches the headlamps from
high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the lowbeam headlamp range depending on the
distance to the other vehicle. Once the
system no longer detects any other vehicles,
it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no
other road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below
approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other
road users have been detected or the roads
are adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X To switch off: move the combination
switch back to its normal position or move
the light switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
The headlamps may fog up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
To switch on: turn the light switch to
Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the
multifunction display lights up if it is dark
and the light sensor activates the low-beam
headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h):
X
Switch on the light and drive off.
The level of moisture diminishes,
depending on the length of the journey and
the weather conditions (humidity and
temperature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X
X
Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Interior lighting
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
123
Interior lighting control
General notes
Automatic interior lighting control
Front overhead control panel
: u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off
; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
= p To switch the right-hand front
reading lamp on/off
? c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
A p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
Front overhead control panel
: u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off
; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
= p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
? c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
Rear-compartment overhead control panel
: p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
; p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
X
To activate/deactivate: press the |
button.
When the automatic interior lighting
control is activated, the button is flush with
the overhead control panel.
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient
lighting may be set using the on-board
computer (Y page 231).
Replacing bulbs
124
The interior lighting automatically switches
on if you:
the vehicle
Ropen a door
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 232).
Lights and windshield wipers
Runlock
Manual interior lighting control
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
X
To switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard
warning lamp button.
or
X
Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs
G DANGER
Front overhead control panel
: u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off.
; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
= p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
? c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
To switch the front interior lighting on/
off: press the c button.
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
off: press the u button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button.
X
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get
an electric shock if you remove the cover of
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical
contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Never touch the parts or the electrical
contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work
on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
LED lamps
You can neither replace Xenon bulbs nor LED
bulbs. Have LED bulbs changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Other bulbs
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
Windshield wipers
There are bulbs other than Xenon and LED
bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only
the bulbs listed (Y page 125). Have the bulbs
that you cannot replace yourself changed at
a qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance changing bulbs,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
your bare hands. Even minor contamination
can burn into the glass surface and reduce
the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb
when installing.
Only use bulbs of the correct type.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
Changing the rear bulbs
Backup light
Lamp unit
Switch off the lights.
Open the trunk.
X Reach up into the side paneling and pull
downwards until the lamp cluster is easily
accessible.
X Press the detent of connector ; and pull
out connector ;.
X Use a suitable tool to loosen and remove
four nuts :.
X Remove the entire lamp cluster.
X Turn bulb holder = counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Pull out bulb.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =.
X Insert bulb holder = into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Re-insert the lamp cluster.
X Tighten four nuts :.
X Push in connector ; until it engages.
X Insert the side paneling.
X
X
Windshield wipers
Tail lamp
: Backup lamp: W 16 W
Switching the windshield wipers on/
off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
125
126
Windshield wipers
that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the
windshield wipers.
Lights and windshield wipers
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to optical influences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Switch on the ignition.
X Turn the combination switch to the
corresponding position.
X
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
wiping frequency is set automatically
according to the intensity of the rain. In
the Å position, the rain sensor is more
sensitive than in the Ä position, causing
the windshield wipers to wipe more
frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic
conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a
year, ideally in spring and fall.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk
of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wiper off
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B í Single wipe/î To wipe the
windshield using washer fluid
arm has been folded away from the
windshield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without
a wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield may be damaged by the force of
the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Windshield wipers
Changing the wiper blades (version 1)
Changing the wiper blades (version 2)
Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Fold the wiper arm away from the
windshield until it engages.
Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Fold the wiper arm away from the
windshield until it engages.
X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the
wiper arm.
X
X
Remove the wiper blade from the retaining
pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the
arrow.
Installing the wiper blades
X Push the new wiper blade onto the
retaining pin on the wiper arm in the
opposite direction to the arrow.
Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully
onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm.
X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper
arm.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
windshield.
Firmly press release knob : and pull the
wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in
the direction of the arrow.
Installing the wiper blades
X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer
on the wiper arm and slide it into place in
the opposite direction from the arrow.
The wiper blade audibly engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade is seated
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
windshield.
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
Depending on the equipment level of your
vehicle, there are two variants of wiper blade;
these are installed and removed in different
ways. Based on the diagrams, check which
system is installed in your vehicle.
127
128
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
129
130
130
135
142
Climate control
Useful information ............................
Overview of climate control systems ...................................................
Operating the climate control systems ...................................................
Setting the air vents .........................
130
Overview of climate control systems
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
Climate control
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Overview of climate control systems
Important safety notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could
otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch
Rswitch
briefly
off climate control only briefly
on air-recirculation mode only
Rswitch
on the cooling with air
dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when
the engine is running. Optimum operation is
only achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
The residual heat function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 141).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the
convenience opening feature (Y page 89).
This will speed up the cooling process and
the desired vehicle interior temperature
will be reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter filters out most
particles of dust and soot and completely
filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous
pollutants and odors. A clogged filter
reduces the amount of air supplied to the
vehicle interior. For this reason, you should
always observe the interval for replacing
the filter, which is specified in the
Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on
environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air
pollution, the interval may be shorter than
stated in the Maintenance Booklet.
Overview of climate control systems
131
Canada only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 138)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 139)
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 139)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 136)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 140)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 138)
C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 138)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 135)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 137)
Climate control
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
132
Overview of climate control systems
USA only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 138)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 139)
= Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 139)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 136)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 140)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 138)
C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 138)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 135)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 137)
Information about using dual-zone
automatic climate control
Automatic climate control
The following contains notes and
recommendations on optimum use of dualzone automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the à and ¿ buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly
use the "Windshield defrosting"
function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side
for the front-passenger side as well. The
Overview of climate control systems
133
indicator lamp above the á button goes
out.
RVehicles with COMAND MultimediaSystem: if you change the settings of the
climate control system, the climate status
display appears for approximately three
seconds at the bottom of the screen in the
COMAND display. See also the separate
COMAND operating instructions. You will
see the current settings of the various
climate control functions.
During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
start/stop function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
climate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 152).
Climate control
ECO start/stop function
134
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 138)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 139)
= Switches the residual heat function on/off (Y page 141)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 136)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 140)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 138)
C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 139)
D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 135)
E Sets the air distribution (Y page 138)
F Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
G Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 137)
I Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141)
J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 137)
Rear control panel
K Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
L Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
M Display
N Reduces the temperature (Y page 138)
O Increases the temperature (Y page 138)
Operating the climate control systems
Automatic climate control
The 3-zone automatic climate control is only
available on vehicles for Canada.
The following contains instructions and
recommendations to enable you to get the
most out of your automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the à and ¿ buttons light up.
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the
ñ button to set a climate mode
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The
MEDIUM level is recommended.
RSet the temperature to f 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"
function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side
for the front-passenger side and the rear
compartment as well. The indicator lamp
above the á button goes out.
RUse the residual heat function if you want
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior
when the ignition is switched off. The
residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched
off.
RVehicles with COMAND MultimediaSystem: if you change the settings of the
climate control system, the climate status
display appears for approximately three
seconds at the bottom of the screen in the
COMAND display. See also the separate
COMAND operating instructions. You will
see the current settings of the various
climate control functions.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
start/stop function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
climate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 152).
Operating the climate control
systems
Switching climate control on/off
Points to observe before use
When the climate control is switched off, the
air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. The windows could fog up.
Therefore, switch off climate control only
briefly
i Activate climate control primarily using
the à button (Y page 137).
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To switch on: press the à button on
the control panel for the climate control.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
X To switch off: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
X
Climate control
Information about using 3-zone
automatic climate control
135
Operating the climate control systems
136
Activating/deactivating cooling with
air dehumidification
Climate control
Points to observe before use
If you deactivate the "Cooling with airdehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with airdehumidification function only briefly.
The cooling with air dehumidification function
is only available when the engine is running.
The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a
malfunction.
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up.
i When the "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function is activated,
one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliary
heating button will light up on vehicles with
auxiliary heating.
X
X
To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Operating the climate control systems
137
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in
the ¿ button
flashes three times or
remains off. The
"Cooling with air
dehumidification"
function cannot be
switched on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
malfunction.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
Points to observe before use
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow
and the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is activated. If necessary, cooling
with air dehumidification can be deactivated.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with airdehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with airdehumidification function only briefly.
Activating/switching
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X Set the desired temperature.
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated.
i 3-zone automatic climate control: when
automatic mode is activated, you can
select a climate mode (Y page 137).
X
X
To switch to manual mode: press the
_ button.
or
X
Press the I or K button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out.
Adjusting the climate mode settings
The "Set climate mode" function is only
available with 3-zone automatic climate
control.
You can select the following climate mode
settings in automatic mode:
FOCUS
high airflow that is set slightly
cooler
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
warmer and with less draft
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X Press the à button.
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
desired climate mode appears in the
display.
X
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Operating the climate control systems
138
Setting the temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To increase/reduce: turn temperature
control : or B clockwise or counterclockwise (Y page 131).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Climate control
X
3-zone automatic climate control
Automatic climate control zones
You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
well as for the rear compartment.
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To increase/reduce the temperature in
the front compartment: turn temperature
control : or B clockwise or counterclockwise (Y page 134).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X To increase/reduce the temperature in
the rear compartment using the front
control panel: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
X Turn temperature control : clockwise or
counter-clockwise (Y page 134).
X
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
The temperature setting for the driver's
side is adopted for the rear compartment
and the front-passenger side.
X To increase/reduce the temperature in
the rear compartment using the rear
control panel: press the r or s
button on the rear control panel.
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
P Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents
S Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
b Directs the airflow through the
defroster, center and side air vents
(Canada only)
a Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
_ Directs the airflow through the
defroster, center and side air vents, as
well as the footwell air vents (Canada
only)
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be
closed when the controls on the side air
vents are turned downwards.
Setting the air distribution
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
X
Operating the climate control systems
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To increase: press the K button.
X To reduce: press the I button.
X
i You can use 3-zone automatic climate
control to set the airflow in the rear
compartment separately.
If the battery is not sufficiently charged,
blower output may be reduced. As soon as
the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower
output will be available.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp above the á button
lights up.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
not adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
not adopted for the front-passenger side
and the rear compartment.
X To deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp above the á button
goes out.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
adopted for the front-passenger side and
the rear compartment.
X
Defrosting the windshield
You can use this function to defrost the
windshield or to defrost the inside of the
windshield and the side windows.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting"
function as soon as the windshield is clear
again.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Rhigh
airflow
temperature
Rair distribution to the windshield and
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
Rhigh
If the battery is not sufficiently charged,
blower output may be reduced. Once the
battery is sufficiently charged again, full
blower output will be available again.
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
X Press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn
temperature controls : or B clockwise
or counter-clockwise (Y page 131).
3-zone automatic climate control: turn
temperature controls : or B clockwise
or counter-clockwise (Y page 134).
or
X Press the K or I button.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in
vehicles for the USA.
Climate control
Setting the airflow
139
Operating the climate control systems
140
MAX COOL is only operational when the
engine is running.
X To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X To activate: press off-road button Ù
again.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
selected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate
control switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum
cooling
airflow
Rair-recirculation mode on
Climate control
Rmaximum
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
Activate the ¿ cooling with air
dehumidification function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmed
air is directed to the side windows.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "windshield defrosting" function
(Y page 139).
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
X
Windows fogged up on the outside
Press the _ button repeatedly until the
P or O symbol appears in the
display.
X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is
directed to the side windows.
X
Rear window defroster
Activating/deactivating
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off
automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
window defroster may switch off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Operating the climate control systems
141
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window
defroster has
deactivated
prematurely or cannot
be activated.
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating airrecirculation mode
g button does not light up. Outside air
is added after about 30 minutes.
Points to observe before use
To deactivate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes
out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates
automatically:
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To activate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button lights
up.
i Dual-zone automatic climate control: airrecirculation mode is automatically
activated at high outside temperatures.
3-zone automatic climate control: airrecirculation mode is automatically
activated at high levels of pollution or at
high outside temperatures.
When air-recirculation mode is activated
automatically, the indicator lamp above the
X
Rafter
approximately five minutes at
outside temperatures below
approximately 41 ‡ (5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if
cooling with air dehumidification is
deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at
outside temperatures above
approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling
with air dehumidification" function is
activated
Activating/deactivating the residual
heat function
The residual heat function is only available in
vehicles for Canada with 3-zone automatic
climate control.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
has been switched off. The heating time
depends on the temperature that has been
set.
Climate control
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle
from outside. The air already inside the
vehicle will then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in
particular at low temperatures. Only use airrecirculation mode briefly to prevent the
windows from fogging up.
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels.
X
Setting the air vents
142
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock or remove it (Y page 147).
X To activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up.
i If the residual heat function is activated,
the windows may fog up on the inside.
X
Setting the center air vents
i The blower will run at a low speed
regardless of the airflow setting.
i If you activate the residual heat function
Climate control
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.
X
To deactivate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
approximately 30 minutes
the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
: Center air vent, left
; Center air vent, right
= Center vent thumbwheel, right
? Center vent thumbwheel, left
X
To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
and ? up or down.
Rafter
Rwhen
Setting the side air vents
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air
outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep
the air inlet between the windshield
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
: Defroster vent
; Side air vent
= Control for side air vent
X
To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
Setting the glove box air vent
! Close the air vent when heating the
vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air
Setting the air vents
dehumidification" function. Otherwise,
temperature-sensitive items stored in the
glove box could be damaged.
143
= Rear control panel, only for Canada with
3-zone automatic climate control
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X
To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
: Air vent thumbwheel
Climate control
; Air vent
When automatic climate control is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents. The level of airflow
depends on the airflow and air distribution
settings.
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :
clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air
vents
Setting the center vents in the rear
compartment
: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
Z
144
Useful information ............................
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Driving ...............................................
Automatic transmission ...................
Refueling ............................................
Parking ...............................................
Driving tips ........................................
Driving systems ................................
146
146
146
155
164
167
169
175
Driving and parking
145
146
Driving
Useful information
Driving and parking
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notes
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after
several hundred kilometers of driving.
Compensate for this by applying greater force
to the brake pedal.
The first 1000miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance in the future.
should therefore drive at varying
vehicle and engine speeds for the first
1000 miles (1500 km).
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full
throttle, during this period.
RChange gear in good time, before the
tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the
red area of the tachometer.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to
brake the vehicle.
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator
pedal past the point of resistance
(kickdown).
ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when
driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate
the vehicle to full speed.
Additional breaking-in notes for AMG
vehicles:
RDo
not drive faster than 85 mph
(140 km/h) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly.
RChange gear in good time.
i You should also observe these notes on
breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
i Always observe the respective speed
limits.
AMG vehicles with self-locking rear
axle differential
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking
differential on the rear axle. To protect the
differential on the rear axle, carry out an oil
change after a breaking-in phase of
2000 miles (3000 km). This oil change
prolongs the service life of the differential.
Have the oil change carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
RYou
Driving
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats.
Driving
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes
with thick soles
with high heels
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
Rshoes
operation, avoid driving at full throttle when
the engine is cold.
Key positions
Driving and parking
G WARNING
SmartKey
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat
and cause a fire
its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
Rlose
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to
the desired drive position when the vehicle
is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. You could otherwise damage the
drive train.
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil
temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the
maximum engine speed is restricted in
order to protect the engine. To protect the
engine and maintain smooth engine
147
g To remove the SmartKey
(shift the transmission to position P)
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3 To start the engine
i The SmartKey can be turned in the
ignition lock even if it is not the correct
SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
switched on. The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
RDo not store the KEYLESS-GO key together
with:
- electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey
- metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in metal
objects, e.g. metal cases.
This can affect the functionality of
KEYLESS-GO.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
keys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-GO
function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
Z
Driving and parking
148
Driving
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts
immediately.
The Start/Stop button can be removed from
the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock when you
leave the vehicle. You should, however,
always take the SmartKey with you when
leaving the vehicle. As long as the
SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the
Start/Stop button and
Relectrically powered equipment can be
operated.
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
X
Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition
lock ;.
i When you insert Start/Stop button :
into ignition lock ;, the system needs
approximately two seconds recognition
time. You can then use Start/Stop
button :.
Activating power supply
Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
The power supply is switched on. You can
now activate the windshield wipers, for
example.
i If you then open the driver's door when in
this position, the power supply is
deactivated.
Switching on the ignition
X
Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop
button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
i The ignition is switched off when:
X
Rthe
driver's door is opened and
press Start/Stop button : once
when in this position.
Ryou
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
starting the engine or lights up while driving,
see (Y page 266).
Start/Stop button
= USA only
? Canada only
Driving
Important safety notes
General notes
i The catalytic converter is preheated for
up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The
sound of the engine may change during this
time.
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Rstarting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G WARNING
Automatic transmission
X
i You can also start the engine when the
transmission is in position N.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
i To start the engine using the SmartKey
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/
Stop button out of the ignition lock.
X
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147) and release it as
soon as the engine is running.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
i The Start/Stop button can be used to
start the vehicle manually without inserting
the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The
Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in
the vehicle. This mode for starting the
engine operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine start function.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
G WARNING
Shift the transmission to position P.
The transmission position display in the
multifunction display shows P.
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 147).
The engine starts.
X
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
Z
Driving and parking
Starting the engine
149
Driving
150
Pulling away
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
! If a warning tone sounds and the
Release Park. Brake message appears
in the multifunction display, the parking
brake is still applied. Release the parking
brake.
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 169).
X Release the brake pedal.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
X
i It is only possible to shift the transmission
from position P to the desired position if
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
the parking lock released. If you do not
depress the brake pedal, you can move the
DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock
remains engaged.
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at
any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic
locking feature (Y page 232).
i Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
Hill start assist
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no
longer brake your vehicle and it could roll
away. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
X Take your foot off the brake pedal.
The vehicle is then held for about a second.
X Pull away.
Hill start assist will not function if:
Ryou
are pulling away on a level road or on
a downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Rthe parking brake is applied.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is
stopped under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
start/stop function thereby helps you to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
of your vehicle.
Driving
G WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
General notes
: ECO start/stop display
If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop
function switches the engine off
automatically if the vehicle stops moving.
Every time you switch on the engine using the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO
start/stop function is activated.
If the ECO start/stop function has been
manually deactivated (Y page 152) or a
malfunction has caused the system to be
deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not
displayed.
AMG vehicles: the Stop/Start active or
Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG
menu in the multifunction display goes out.
AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function
is only available in drive program C.
For further information on automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 151) and automatic
engine start (Y page 152).
Automatic engine switch-off
General notes
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or
N, the ECO start/stop function switches off
the engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in
the multifunction display, if:
Rthe
indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
Rthe outside temperature is within the
comfort range.
Rthe engine is at normal operating
temperature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is
not fogged up when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
Rthe hood is closed.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
If conditions for automatic engine switch-off
have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will
be shown in yellow.
AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the
multifunction display also shows the Stop/
Start inactive message.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available
again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
green in the multifunction display.
i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine has been stopped
automatically.
i All vehicles (apart from AMG
vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can
take place a maximum of four times
consecutively (initial stop then repeated
three times). The ¤ symbol is shown in
yellow in the multifunction display after the
engine has been started automatically for
Z
Driving and parking
Important safety notes
151
152
Driving
Driving and parking
the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is
shown in green in the multifunction display,
automatic engine switch-off is again
possible.
i AMG vehicles: times which the engine
again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
green in the multifunction display.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/
stop function
can be automatically switched off.
i The HOLD function can also be activated
if the engine has been switched off
automatically. It is then not necessary to
continue applying the brakes during the
automatic stop phase. When you depress
the accelerator pedal, the engine starts
automatically and the braking effect of the
HOLD function is deactivated.
Automatic engine start
ECO button
The engine starts automatically if:
X
Ryou
switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button.
Ryou release the brakes when in
transmission position D or N and when the
HOLD function is not active.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Ryou engage reverse gear R.
Ryou move the transmission out of position
P.
Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M
(AMG vehicles).
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the
driver's door.
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
Rthe brake system requires this.
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior
deviates from the set range.
Rthe system detects moisture on the
windshield when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
Rthe charge level of the battery is too low.
i Shifting the transmission to position P
does not start the engine.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available
To switch off (except AMG vehicles):
press button :.
Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in
the multifunction display go out.
X To switch on (except AMG vehicles):
press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
for automatic engine switch-off
(Y page 151) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol
is shown in green in the multifunction
display.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 151) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the
multifunction display. If this is the case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available.
X
To switch off (AMG vehicles): press
button : in drive program C.
or
X
Switch to drive program S, S+ or M
(Y page 159).
Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in
the multifunction display go out.
The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start
inactive message in the AMG menu in the
multifunction display goes out.
Driving
To switch on (AMG vehicles): press
button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive
program S, S+ or M is active, the automatic
transmission switches to drive program C.
If all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 151) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in green in the
multifunction display. In addition, the
Stop/Start active message is shown in
the AMG menu in the multifunction display.
If conditions for automatic engine switchoff (Y page 151) have not been fulfilled, the
¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If this
is the case, the ECO start/stop function is
not available. In addition, the Stop/Start
inactive message is shown in the AMG
menu in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
X
153
i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
stop function has been deactivated
manually or as the result of a malfunction.
The engine will then not be switched off
automatically when the vehicle stops.
Z
154
Driving
Driving and parking
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey
in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 149). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
RThere
RThere
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
or discharged.
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 326).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
X
If the engine still does not start:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine is not
running smoothly and
is misfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
The coolant
temperature gauge
shows a value above
248 ‡ (120 †).
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
to cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 308). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
Transmission position and drive
program display
! If the transmission position display in the
multifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whether
the desired transmission position is
engaged. Ideally, you should select
transmission position D and drive program
C. Do not restrict the shift range.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
Selector lever
Overview of transmission positions
: Transmission position display
; Drive program display
The current position of the selector lever is
shown by the indicators next to the selector
lever.
The indicators light up when the SmartKey is
inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators
go out when the SmartKey is removed from
the ignition lock.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button
j Park position with parking lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
j Park position with parking lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
Z
Driving and parking
Automatic transmission
155
156
Automatic transmission
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
Driving and parking
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current
transmission position P, R, N or D appears
in the transmission position display
(Y page 155) in the multifunction display.
Transmission position and drive
program display
! If the transmission position display in the
multifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whether
the desired transmission position is
engaged. Ideally, you should select
transmission position D and drive program
E or S. Do not restrict the shift range.
j Park position with parking lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the
direction of arrow P.
i The automatic transmission shifts into
park position P automatically:
Rif
: Transmission position display
; Drive program display
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
i The arrows in the transmission position
display show how and into which
transmission positions you can change
using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
Engaging park position P
! If the engine speed is too high or the
vehicle is moving, do not shift the
automatic transmission directly from D to
R, from R to D or directly to P. The
automatic transmission could otherwise be
damaged.
you open the driver's door while the
vehicle is stationary in transmission
position D or R
Rif you open the door while traveling at
very low speeds in transmission position
D or R
HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS: if the
vehicle is braked using the HOLD function or
DISTRONIC PLUS, the automatic
transmission shifts automatically to
transmission position P. In addition, at least
one of the following conditions must be
fulfilled:
Rthe
engine is switched off.
driver's door is open and the seat belt
is not in the buckle.
Rthe
Automatic transmission
Engaging park position P in AMG
vehicles
157
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
X
When the vehicle is stationary, press P
button :.
Engaging reverse gear R
! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
X
Shifting to neutral N
If the engine has been switched off, the
automatic transmission automatically shifts
to N.
If the automatic transmission is to remain in
neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car
washes with a towing device, please observe
the following instructions:
Using the SmartKey:
RMake
sure that the ignition is switched on.
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
to neutral N.
RRelease the brake pedal.
RIf the parking brake is engaged, release it.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
RShift
RMake
sure that the ignition is switched on.
G WARNING
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
REngage
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Rstarting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
Rshift
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
park position P.
RRelease the brake pedal.
RRemove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
RSwitch on the ignition.
RDepress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
RShift to neutral N.
RRelease the brake pedal.
RIf the parking brake is engaged, release it.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Z
Driving and parking
X
Automatic transmission
158
Engaging drive position D
A
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
Driving and parking
X
Transmission positions
B
C
Park position
Do not shift the transmission into
position P(Y page 167) unless the
vehicle is stationary. The parking
lock should not be used as a brake
when parking. In addition to
engaging the parking lock, you
must always apply the parking
brake to secure the vehicle.
If the vehicle electronics are
malfunctioning, the transmission
may be locked in position P.
Have the vehicle electronics
checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. The transmission
could otherwise be damaged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
only shift the transmission to
position N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
! Rolling in neutral N can damage
the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the
individual gears automatically when it is in
transmission position D. This automatic
gearshifting behavior is determined by:
Ra
shift range restriction, if selected
selected drive program (Y page 159)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Rthe
Driving tips
AMG vehicles
When shifting down, the double-clutch
function is active regardless of the currently
selected drive program. The double-clutch
function reduces load change reactions and
is conducive to a sporty driving style. The
sound generated by the double-clutch
function depends on the drive program
selected.
Automatic transmission
159
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Rocking the vehicle free
Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and
forth between transmission positions D and
R can help to free a vehicle that has become
stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine
management restricts repeated shifting
between gears D and R up to a maximum
speed of up to 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back
and forth between transmission positions D
and R, move the selector lever up and down
beyond the pressure point.
Program selector button
General notes
Vehicles with the Sports package AMG
X
Press program selector button :
repeatedly until the letter for the desired
drive program appears in the multifunction
display.
The program selector button allows you to
choose between different driving
characteristics.
E Economy
Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport
Sporty driving style
M Manual
Manual gear shifting
i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 160).
i The automatic transmission shifts to
automatic drive program E each time the
engine is started.
AMG vehicles
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles and vehicles with
the Sports package AMG)
X
Press program selector button :
repeatedly until the letter for the desired
gearshift program appears in the
multifunction display.
Drive program selector with manual drive program
Z
Driving and parking
X
Automatic transmission
160
Driving and parking
X
Turn drive program selector : until the
desired drive program appears in the
multifunction display in the speedometer.
The drive program indicator on drive
program selector : lights up in red.
C Controlled
Efficiency
Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport
Sporty driving style
S+ SportPlus
Extremely sporty driving
style
M Manual
Manual gear shifting
RS RACE
START
Optimal vehicle
acceleration from a
standstill
i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 160).
Only change from automatic drive program C,
S or S+ to manual drive program M when the
vehicle is stationary.
i The automatic transmission shifts to
automatic drive program C each time the
engine is started.
i RS cannot be selected during normal
driving. For further information on RACE
START, see (Y page 188).
Steering wheel paddle shifters
In the automatic drive program, you can
restrict or derestrict the shift range by using
the steering wheel paddle shifters
(Y page 162).
i You can only change gear with the
steering wheel paddle shifters when the
transmission is in position D.
Automatic drive program
Automatic drive programs E and S
Drive program E (drive program C on MAG
vehicles) is characterized by the following:
Rcomfort-oriented
engine and automatic
transmission settings
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
example
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG
vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is
characterized by the following:
Rsporty
engine and automatic transmission
settings
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic
transmission shift points
: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
Automatic transmission
General notes
You can activate manual drive program M in
the E and S automatic drive programs.
In manual drive program M, you can briefly
change gear yourself by using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must
be in position D.
Activating
X Shift the transmission to position D.
X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 160).
Manual drive program M is temporarily
activated. The selected gear and M appear
in the multifunction display.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The
recommended gear is shown in the
multifunction display.
X Shift to recommended gear ; according
to gearshift recommendation : when
shown in the multifunction display of the
instrument cluster.
Shifting gears
If you pull on the left or right steering wheel
paddle shifter, the automatic transmission
switches to manual drive program M for a
limited amount of time. Depending on which
paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic
transmission immediately shifts into the next
gear down or up, if permitted.
X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering
wheel paddle shifter (Y page 160).
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
i If the maximum engine speed on the
currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic
transmission automatically shifts up in
order to prevent engine damage.
Disarming
If you have activated manual drive program
M, it will remain active for a certain amount
of time. Under certain conditions the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in
the case of lateral acceleration, during an
overrun phase or when driving on steep
terrain.
If manual drive program M has been
deactivated, the automatic transmission
shifts into the automatic drive program that
was last selected, i.e. E or S.
You can also deactivate manual drive
program M yourself:
To shift down: pull on the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter
(Y page 160).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
i If the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the
automatic transmission protects against
engine damage by not shifting down.
or
X
i Automatic down shifting occurs when
X
X
Pull on the right-hand steering wheel
paddle shifter and hold it in place
(Y page 160).
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
X
Use the program selector button to change
the drive program (Y page 159).
Manual drive program M is deactivated.
The automatic transmission switches into
the automatic drive program that was last
selected, i.e. E or S.
coasting.
Z
Driving and parking
Manual drive program M
161
Automatic transmission
162
restricted. This prevents the engine from
overrevving.
Shift ranges
Introduction
Driving and parking
i You can restrict or derestrict the shift
range by using the steering wheel paddle
shifters.
When the automatic transmission is in
position D, it is possible to restrict or expand
the shift range (Y page 162).
The shift range selected is shown in the
multifunction display. The automatic
transmission shifts only as far as the selected
gear.
Shift range:
= You can use the engine's braking
effect
5 You can use the braking effect of
the engine on downhill gradients
and for driving:
Extending the shift range
X
Clearing the shift range restriction
X
X
steep mountain roads
mountainous terrain
Rin arduous conditions
Rin
Restricting the shift range
X
Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts down
one gear and restricts the shift range to the
relevant gear.
i If the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the
automatic transmission protects against
engine damage by not shifting down.
i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
range is reached and you continue to
accelerate, the automatic transmission
shifts up, even if the shift range is
Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel
paddle shifter until D is shown again in the
multifunction display.
The automatic transmission shifts from the
current shift range directly to D.
Selecting the ideal shift range
Ron
4 To use the braking effect of the
engine on extremely steep downhill
gradients and on long downhill
stretches
Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The shift range is derestricted.
Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter and hold it in position.
The automatic transmission shifts to the
gear which allows optimum acceleration
and deceleration. To do this, the automatic
transmission shifts down one or more
gears.
Manual drive program (AMG vehicles
and vehicles with AMG Sports
package)
Switching on the manual drive program
X
Turn the drive program selector
(Y page 159) until M appears in the
multifunction display.
The indicator M on the drive program
selector lights up in red.
The manual drive program is only available for
AMG vehicles.
Manual drive program M is different from
drive programs S and S+ with regard to
spontaneity, responsiveness and
smoothness of gear changes.
Manual drive program M can be selected
using the drive program selector. In manual
drive program M, you can change gear using
Automatic transmission
Upshifting
! In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up
automatically even when the engine
limiting speed for the current gear is
reached. When the engine limiting speed is
reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent
the engine from overrevving. Always make
sure that the engine speed does not reach
the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
X
transmission selects the optimum gear for
the current speed.
Kickdown
i Kickdown is not possible in manual drive
program M.
Switching off the manual drive program
Press the program selector button
(Y page 159) repeatedly until E or S
appears in the multifunction display.
X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program
selector (Y page 159) until C, S or S+
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
: Upshift indicator
; Gear indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the
multifunction display.
Downshifting
X
Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
i If you brake the vehicle or stop without
shifting down, the automatic transmission
will shift down to a gear that will allow the
vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the
Z
Driving and parking
the steering wheel paddle shifters if the
transmission is in position D. The gear
currently selected and engaged is shown in
the multifunction display.
163
164
Refueling
Problems with the transmission
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.
is deteriorating.
It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no
X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash
away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance
without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
assistance without delay. Do not induce
vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
Refueling
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. The repair
costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist
workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel
lines drained completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
= Tire pressure table
? Fuel type to be used
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
automatically when you open or close the
vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESSGO.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
next to the filling pump indicates the side of
the vehicle.
Opening the fuel filler flap
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
system could be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 374).
Refueling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
: To open the fuel filler flap
; To insert the fuel filler cap
= Tire pressure table
? Fuel type to be used
Switch the engine off.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.
This corresponds to key position 0: "key
removed".
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X
: To open the fuel filler flap
; To insert the fuel filler cap
Z
Driving and parking
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
165
Refueling
166
insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on
the inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.
Driving and parking
X
Closing the fuel filler flap
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
X
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the
central locking prevents the fuel filler flap
from closing.
i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes. A message appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 251).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 273).
For further information on warning and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
see (Y page 273).
Fuel filler flap emergency release
X
X
open the trunk lid.
Slide down the parcel net.
Open the right-hand side trim panel.
X Remove the first-aid kit (Y page 320).
X Detach the emergency release from
retainer :.
X Pull the emergency release in the direction
of arrow ;.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
X
Parking
167
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove
it immediately (Y page 147).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap
cannot be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 78).
X Open the trunk lid or the tailgate.
X open the trunk lid.
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 166).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is
jammed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If flammable materials such as leaves, grass
or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to
parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they
could ignite. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable
materials come into contact with parts of the
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not
to park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
Rreleasing
the parking brake
the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P
Rstarting the engine.
They could also operate the vehicle's
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
Rshifting
Z
Driving and parking
Problem
Parking
168
Driving and parking
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
or its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
Rthe
parking brake must be applied.
transmission must be in position P and
the SmartKey must be removed from the
ignition lock.
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the curb.
Rthe
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
Apply the parking brake firmly.
X All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): shift
the transmission to position P.
X
Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button
X
AMG vehicles: press P button :.
Using the SmartKey
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
i If you turn off the engine with the
SmartKey and then remove it from the
ignition lock or open a front door, the
automatic transmission shifts to P
automatically.
Using KEYLESS-GO
X
Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 147).
The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
i When the driver's door is closed, this
corresponds to key position 1. When the
driver's door is open, this corresponds to
key position 0: "key removed".
X
i If you turn off the engine with the Start/
Stop button, the automatic transmission
shifts to N. If you then open one of the front
doors, the automatic transmission shifts to
P.
i The engine can be turned off while the
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
the Start/Stop button for about three
seconds. This function operates
independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine switch-off function.
Driving tips
G WARNING
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the braking distance is considerably
longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Only use the parking brake to brake the
vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do
not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
wheels lock, release the parking brake until
the wheels begin turning again.
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
Rreleasing
the parking brake
the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P
Rstarting the engine.
They could also operate the vehicle's
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rshifting
To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
When the engine is running, the $ (USA
only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
X To release: depress the brake pedal and
keep it depressed.
X Pull release handle :.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the $ (USA only) or
J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out
in the instrument cluster.
X
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as
a result of lack of use.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice.
i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist
workshop.
X
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the brake lamps will not light up.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If you operate mobile communication
equipment while driving, you will be
Z
Driving and parking
Parking brake
169
Driving tips
Driving and parking
170
distracted from traffic conditions. You could
also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle covers
a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
second.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
The tires should always be inflated to the
recommended tire pressure.
X Remove unnecessary loads.
X Remove roof racks when they are not
needed.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
interval display.
X
Fuel consumption also increases when
driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic
and in hilly terrain.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Emission control
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. For this
reason, only have work on the engine carried
out by qualified and authorized MercedesBenz technicians.
The engine settings must not be changed
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
specific service work must be carried out at
regular intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
Drinking and driving
G WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
judgment.
Example: ECO display
The ECO display gives you information on how
economical your driving style is. The ECO
display assists you in achieving the optimum
Driving tips
RAcceleration
RConstant
RCoasting
The percent value is the average value of the
three bars. The three bars and the mean value
begin at the value of 50%. A higher
percentage indicates a more economical
driving style.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption and a fixed percentage
count in the ECO display does not indicate a
fixed consumption figure.
Apart from driving style, consumption is
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
Rload
Rcheck
Rcold
start
of route
Relectrical consumers switched on
These factors are not taken into
consideration by the ECO display.
The evaluation of your driving style is carried
out using the following three categories:
Rchoice
(evaluation of all
acceleration processes):
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
at all times):
- The bar fills up: constant speed and
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
and deceleration
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes):
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
keeping your distance and early release
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
without use of the brakes.
- The bar empties: frequent braking
RAcceleration
i An economical driving style specially
requires driving at moderate engine
speeds.
To achieve a higher value in the categories
Acceleration and Constant:
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rdrive in drive program E.
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
on the highway, only the bar for Constant
will change.
i The ECO display summaries the driving
characteristics from the start of the journey
to its completion. For this reason, the bars
change dynamically at the beginning of the
journey. On longer journeys, there are
fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,
carry out a manual reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 223).
Z
Driving and parking
driving style in terms of consumption, taking
the actual and selected conditions into
consideration. Your driving style can
significantly influence the vehicle's
consumption.
The ECO display consists of three bars:
171
172
Driving tips
Braking
Important safety notes
Driving and parking
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting
early to a lower gear. This allows you to take
advantage of the engine braking effect and
helps avoid overheating and excessive
wear of the brakes.
When you take advantage of the engine
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road
surface. This could cause damage to the
drive train. This type of damage is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the
brakes to rub by constantly applying light
pressure to the pedal. This results in
excessive and premature wear to the brake
pads.
On long and steep downhill gradients, you
must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time.
This is especially important if the vehicle is
laden.
Heavy and light loads
G WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
drive on for a short while. This allows the
airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed
reaction from the brakes when braking for the
first time. This may also occur after the
vehicle has been washed or driven through
deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the
vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
attention to the traffic conditions. This will
warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them
more quickly and protecting them against
corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salttreated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
residue may form on the brake discs and
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
longer braking distance.
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
salt residue. Make sure that you do not
endanger other road users when doing so.
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and you hear a
warning tone while the engine is running,
the brake fluid level may be too low.
Observe additional warning messages in
the multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked
immediately. This work should be carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or
performance tests may only be carried out
on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are
planning to have the vehicle tested on such
a dynamometer, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further
information first. Otherwise, you could
damage the drive train or the brake system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®
system operates automatically, the engine
and the ignition must be switched off
(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition
lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or
1) while the parking brake is being tested
on a brake dynamometer.
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the
ESP®
system operates automatically, the engine
and the ignition system must be switched
off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the
ignition lock or Start/Stop button in
position 0 or 1) when:
Rtesting
the parking brake on a brake
dynamometer.
Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with
one of the axles raised.
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
system.
All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop. Consult a
qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the
functionality of your brakes at regular
intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake
pedal when driving at a high speed. This
improves the grip of the brake pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist
(BAS) on (Y page 67) or of BAS PLUS on
(Y page 67).
The braking characteristics of the vehicle can
be seriously impaired if:
Rbrake pads other than those recommended
are installed
recommended brake fluid is not used
Safe braking can no longer be guaranteed.
Rthe
AMG high-performance and ceramic
brakes
The high-performance brake system is
installed only on the CLS 63 AMG.
The AMG brake systems are designed for
heavy loads. This may lead to noise when
braking. This will depend on:
RSpeed
RBraking
force
REnvironmental
conditions, such as
temperature and humidity
The wear of individual components of the
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
or brake discs, depends on the individual
driving style and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a
mileage that will be valid under all
circumstances. An aggressive driving style
will lead to high wear. You can obtain further
information about this from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
173
Driving and parking
Driving tips
Driving and parking
174
Driving tips
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after
several hundred kilometers of driving.
Compensate for this by applying greater force
to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and
adapt your driving and braking accordingly
during this break-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in
correspondingly high brake wear. Observe
the # brake wear warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and note any brake status
messages in the multifunction display.
Especially for high performance driving, it is
important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of
hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou
drive at low speeds.
tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or
in conditions in which hydroplaning may
occur, you must drive in the following
manner:
Rthe
Rlower
your speed.
ruts.
Rbrake carefully.
Ravoid
Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Check the depth of any water before driving
through it. Drive slowly through standing
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
This can damage the electronic
components in the engine or the automatic
transmission. Water can also be drawn in
by the engine's air suction nozzles and this
can cause engine damage.
Winter driving
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
a window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 336).
Driving with summer tires
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 336).
Slippery road surfaces
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position N.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
i For more information on driving with
snow chains, see (Y page 337).
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your
driving style. Always adapt your driving style
and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
weather conditions.
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
Driving systems
Cruise control
Important safety notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden, you must select shift range
1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will
make use of the braking effect of the engine.
This relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and
wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
control can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics.
Cruise control cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise
control is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
Do not use cruise control:
Rin
road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
accelerating could cause the drive wheels
to lose traction and the vehicle could then
skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden, you must select shift range
1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will
make use of the braking effect of the engine,
which relieves the load on the brake system
and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Z
175
Driving and parking
Driving systems
176
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Cruise control lever
: To activate or increase speed
You can accept the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
; To activate or reduce speed
= To deactivate cruise control
? To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display
for five seconds. In the multifunction display,
the segments between the stored speed and
the maximum speed light up.
Storing the current speed or calling up
the last stored speed
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe
parking brake must be released.
are driving faster than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Ryou
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.
X
Setting a speed
Deactivating cruise control
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph
increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
X
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For
example, if you accelerate briefly to
overtake, cruise control adjusts the
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever
forwards :.
or
X
Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou
depress the parking brake.
are driving at less than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Ryou shift the transmission to position N
while driving.
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
Control Off message in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Ryou
i When you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
DISTRONIC PLUS
Important safety notes
G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
Rpeople
or animals
obstacles on the road, e.g.
stopped or parked vehicles
Roncoming and crossing traffic
Rstationary
Z
177
Driving and parking
Driving systems
Driving and parking
178
Driving systems
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
warnings nor intervene in such situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly
identify other road users and complex traffic
situations.
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
Raccelerate unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, in particular when warned to do so by
DISTRONIC PLUS.
G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this
braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS
warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk
of an accident.
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
try to take evasive action.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen
Rin
towing the vehicle
the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk
of accident nor override the laws of physics.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions.
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin
road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
accelerating could cause the drive wheels
to lose traction and the vehicle could then
skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rdirt
on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
parking garages
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a
vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may
unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the
stored speed.
This speed may:
Rbe
too high if you are driving in a filter lane
or an exit lane
Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive
countries)
Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the right (right-hand
drive countries)
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the
distance to the vehicle detected in front.
Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar
Driving systems
i USA only: This device has been approved
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Cruise control lever
: To store the current speed or a higher
speed
; To store the current speed or a lower
speed
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
? To store the current speed or call up the
last stored speed
A To set the specified minimum distance
Z
Driving and parking
sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes
automatically so that the set speed is not
exceeded.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is
especially important if the vehicle is laden. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot
prevent a collision without your intervention.
An intermittent warning tone will then sound
and the distance warning lamp will light up in
the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
in front or take evasive action provided it is
safe to do so.
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar
sensor system must be operational.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control in the speed range between 20 mph
(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of
you, it operates in the speed range between
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
200 km/h).
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,
it can resemble the radar detectors of the
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
179
Driving systems
180
Driving and parking
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
Activation conditions
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the
following conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe
engine must be started. It may take up
to two minutes after pulling away before
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
Rthe parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
RActive Parking Assist must not be
activated.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rthe hood must be closed.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors
must be closed.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Activating
When driving at speeds below 20 mph
(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC
PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected
and is shown in the multifunction display. If
the vehicle in front is no longer detected and
displayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and
a tone sounds.
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override
message appears in the multifunction
display. The set distance to a slowermoving vehicle in front will then not be
maintained. You will be driving at the speed
you determine by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
Activating when driving towards a
stationary vehicle
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ? or press it up : or down ;.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X
Press the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down ; until the desired speed
is set.
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your
vehicle is stationary as well.
i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ; or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down = until the desired speed
is set.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
X
under 20 mph (30 km/h) if a vehicle in front
has been detected. Therefore, the
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
instrument cluster should be activated
(Y page 227).
i You can use the cruise control lever to set
the stored speed and the control on the
cruise control lever to set the specified
minimum distance (Y page 183).
Activating at the current speed/last
stored speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle
accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know
the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
Driving systems
If you want to pull away with
DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from
the brake pedal.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :
or
X Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
speed to that of the vehicle in front.
X
i The vehicle can also pull away when it is
facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving
on a different line from another vehicle. The
vehicle then brakes automatically. There is
a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at
all times.
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
time it is activated, the current speed is
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
X
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
Pulling away and driving
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front has slowed down, it brakes your
vehicle. In this way, the distance you have
selected is maintained.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up
to the speed you have stored.
Changing lanes
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when:
Ryou
are driving faster than 40 mph
(60 km/h)
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the
distance to a vehicle in front
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle
is accelerated. Acceleration will be
interrupted if changing lanes takes too long
or if the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front becomes too small.
i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
Z
Driving and parking
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic
conditions before calling up the stored speed.
If you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
181
182
Driving systems
vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
drive vehicles.
Driving and parking
Vehicles with COMAND
Example: traffic circle
i The following function is not operational
in all countries.
The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is
canceled and the vehicle can start moving if:
RDISTRONIC
PLUS is deactivated using the
cruise control lever.
Ryou accelerate.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an
interruption in the power supply, e.g.
battery failure.
Rthe electrical system in the engine
compartment, the battery or the fuses are
tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,
deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information
from your navigation system so that it can
react appropriately to certain traffic
situations. This is the case if, while following
a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you:
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
Rapproach
i Depending on the specified minimum
or drive through a traffic circle
a T-intersection
Rturn off at a highway exit
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the
detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS
temporarily maintains the current driving
speed and does not accelerate. This is based
on the current map data in the navigation
system.
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to
the speed you set.
Rapproach
Stopping
G WARNING
Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC
PLUS is activated.
DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be
operated, activated or deactivated by a
passenger or from outside the vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the
parking brake and must not be used for
parking.
distance, your vehicle will come to a
standstill at a sufficient distance behind the
vehicle in front. The specified minimum
distance is set using the control on the
cruise control lever.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the
transmission is shifted automatically to
position P if:
Rthe
driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Rthe hood is opened.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Driving systems
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph
increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
with the minimum distance as required by
law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in
front if necessary.
X
i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished
overtaking.
Setting the specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 184).
X To increase: turn control ; in direction
=.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control ; in
direction :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the
speedometer
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 184).
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient
distance to the vehicle in front and comply
Z
Driving and parking
Setting a speed
183
Driving systems
Driving and parking
184
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
two segments ; in the set speed range light
up.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is
activated
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the
multifunction display
General notes
In the assistance graphics display menu
(Y page 227) of the on-board computer, you
can select the assistance graphics display.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is
deactivated
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Specified minimum distance to the
vehicle in front; adjustable
= Own vehicle
? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only
appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated)
You will see the stored speed for about five
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
X Select the Distance Display function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 227).
i You will see the stored speed for about
five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC
PLUS.
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the
vehicle in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle
X
Select the Distance Display function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 227).
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
Driving systems
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever
forwards :.
or
X
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message
in the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
ROther
vehicles changing lanes
vehicles
RObstructions and stationary vehicles
RCrossing vehicles
In such situations, brake if necessary.
DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
RNarrow
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically
deactivated if:
Ryou
engage the parking brake
are driving slower than 15 mph
(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,
or if the vehicle in front is no longer
detected
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
Rthe vehicle has skidded
Ryou activate Active Parking Assist
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the
multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.
Ryou
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect
vehicles when cornering is limited. Your
vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering,
going into and coming out of a
bend
RVehicles traveling on a different line
Z
Driving and parking
There are several ways to deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS:
185
186
Driving systems
Other vehicles changing lanes
example, the detected vehicle turns a corner
and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,
DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Driving and parking
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the
vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this
vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect
vehicles that are crossing your lane.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights
with crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for
obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
Rwhen
pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Rwhen waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Driving systems
Important safety notes
187
Activating the HOLD function
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere
is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine
compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen
towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe
vehicle is stationary
engine is running or if it has been
automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
is fastened
Rthe parking brake is released
Rthe hood is closed
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Rthe
Make sure that the activation conditions
are met.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until ë: appears in the multifunction
display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
X
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated
automatically if:
Ryou
accelerate and the transmission is in
position D or R.
Ryou shift the transmission to position P.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until ë
disappears from the multifunction display.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
When the HOLD function is activated, the
transmission is shifted automatically to
position P if:
Rthe
driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Rthe hood is opened.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Z
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Driving systems
188
RACE START
Important safety notes
Driving and parking
i Observe the safety notes for the SPORT
handling mode (Y page 70).
RACE START is intended solely for activation
on dedicated race circuits.
RACE START enables optimal acceleration
from a standing start. The precondition for
this is a suitable high-grip road surface.
i RACE START is only available in AMG
vehicles.
Conditions for activation
You can activate RACE START if:
Rthe
doors are closed.
Rthe engine is running and it has reached an
operating temperature of approximately
176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when the
engine oil temperature in the multifunction
display stops flashing.
RSPORT handling mode is activated.
(Y page 70)
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake
pedal is depressed (left foot).
Rthe transmission is in position D.
Activating RACE START
Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
and keep it depressed.
X Turn the drive program selector clockwise
(Y page 159) until the RS lamp lights up.
The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears
in the multifunction display.
i If the activation conditions are no longer
fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The
START Canceled message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
X
To cancel: pull the left steering wheel
paddle shifter (Y page 160).
or
To confirm: pull the right steering wheel
paddle shifter (Y page 160).
The RACE START Available Depress
gas pedal message appears in the
multifunction display.
i If you do not depress the accelerator
pedal fully within two seconds, RACE
START is canceled. The RACE START Not
Possible See Operator's Manual
message appears in the multifunction
display.
X
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The engine speed rises to approximately
3,500 rpm.
The RACE START Release brake to
start message appears in the
multifunction display.
i If you do not release the brake pedal
within five seconds, RACE START is
canceled. The RACE START Canceled
message appears in the multifunction
display.
X
X
Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum
acceleration.
The RACE START Active message appears
in the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph
(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is
activated. SPORT handling mode remains
activated.
RACE START is deactivated immediately if
you release the accelerator pedal during
RACE START or if any of the activation
conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE
START Not Possible See Operator's
Manual message appears in the multifunction
display.
i If RACE START is used repeatedly within
a short period of time, it is only available
again after the vehicle has been driven a
certain distance.
AIRMATIC
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel
arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
G WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
Ryou
have selected comfort suspension
tuning and
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds of switching off the engine
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel
arch or the underbody may thus become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arch or the underbody when you lock
the vehicle.
! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if:
Your vehicle regulates its height
automatically. All-round level control ensures
the best possible suspension and constant
ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered
automatically to improve driving safety and to
reduce fuel consumption.
The following vehicle levels are possible:
Rnormal
Rraised:
the vehicle is raised by about
0.80 in (20 mm) when compared with the
normal level
Rlowered: the vehicle is raised by about
0.40 in (10 mm) when compared with the
normal level
i These changes in level are so slight that
you are hardly aware of them.
The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can
be set manually.
The "Lowered” vehicle level is set
automatically:
Rat
speeds above 70 mph (113 km/h)
you have selected "Sports tuning"
(Y page 190)
Rif
Setting the vehicle level
Select the "Normal" setting for normal road
surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow
chains or on particularly poor road surfaces.
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Setting raised level
Ryou
have selected "Comfort tuning"
switch off the engine and then
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds
When parking, position your vehicle so that
it does not make contact with the curb as
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.
Ryou
If you lock the vehicle within 60 seconds of
switching the engine off, it lowers slightly to
the selected Comfort suspension mode.
X
Start the engine.
Z
189
Driving and parking
Driving systems
Driving systems
190
If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
Driving and parking
X
Sports tuning
Press the : button.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle
height is adjusted to raised level.
The Vehicle Rising message appears in
the display.
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:
Rdrive
at a speed over approximately
75 mph (120 km/h)
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h)
The "Raised level" remains active when you
are not driving within these speed ranges.
Setting the normal level
X Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X
Press the : button.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to normal level.
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each
wheel and depends on:
Ryour
driving style, e.g. sporty
road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or
comfort
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Rthe
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
ensures even better contact with the road.
Select this mode when employing a sporty
driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports
suspension tuning is selected.
The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in
the multifunction display.
Comfort tuning
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable.
Therefore, select this mode if you favor a
more comfortable driving style. Select
comfort mode also when driving fast on
straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of
freeway.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning
is selected.
The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears
in the multifunction display.
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
Driving systems
Sport mode
Driving and parking
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel
arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
G WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
have selected comfort suspension
tuning and
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds of switching off the engine
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel
arch or the underbody may thus become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arch or the underbody when you lock
the vehicle.
Ryou
! The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in
(20 mm) if:
Ryou
have selected "Comfortable tuning"
switch off the engine and then
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds
When parking, position your vehicle so that
it does not make contact with the curb as
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.
Ryou
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each
wheel and depends on:
Ryour
driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport +
or Comfort
191
: Mode selection button
; Button to store, recall and display the
selected mode
= Sport + mode indicator lamp
? Sport mode indicator lamp
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
ensures better contact with the road. Select
this mode when employing a sporty driving
style, e.g. on winding country roads.
X Press button : once.
Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have
selected Sport mode.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT message
appears in the multifunction display.
Sport + mode
The very firm setting of the suspension tuning
in Sport + mode ensures the best possible
contact with the road. Select this mode
primarily when driving on race circuits.
If indicator lamps = and ? are off:
X
Press button : twice.
Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You
have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
appears in the multifunction display.
If indicator lamp ? lights up:
X
Press button : once.
Second indicator lamp = lights up. You
have selected Sport + mode.
Z
Driving systems
192
Driving and parking
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort mode
When comfort mode is selected, the driving
characteristics of your vehicle are more
comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a
comfort-oriented driving style. Select
comfort mode also when driving fast on
straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of
highway.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamps = and ? go out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Ride Control COMFORT
message appears in the multifunction
display.
Storing and calling up settings
Once the suspension tuning and drive
program have been selected, you can store
and call up your settings using AMG
button ;.
X
To store: press AMG button ; until you
hear a tone.
X
To call up: press AMG button ;.
The stored suspension tuning and drive
program are selected.
X
To display: briefly press AMG button ;.
Your selection appears in the multifunction
display.
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel
arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
The vehicle lowers when you press the button
for selecting the suspension tuning or the
AMG button. The vehicle also lowers if it is
stationary.
! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has
been selected, the vehicle's ground
clearance decreases. Make sure that no
objects become trapped or that the vehicle
does not become damaged, for example,
on the curb.
i The vehicle level may change visibly at the
rear axle if you park the vehicle and the
outside temperature changes. If the
temperature drops, the vehicle level
lowers; with an increase in temperature,
the vehicle level rises.
Changing the rear axle ride height
This function is only available for the CLS 63
AMG 4MATIC.
The vehicle level at the rear axle depends on
the selected suspension tuning and the
vehicle speed.
The vehicle level at the rear axle changes
during the journey depending on the selected
suspension tuning:
RComfort:
+0.4 in (+10 mm)
+ and Sport: -0.6 in (-15 mm)
When switching from Comfort to Sport or
Sport +, the rear axle lowers by approximately
1.0 in (25 mm). When switching from Sport
or Sport + to Comfort, the rear axle raises by
approximately 1.0 in (25 mm). This level
change also takes place when the vehicle is
stationary.
If you drive faster than 105 mph (170 km/h),
the rear axle ride height is set to a medium
level. This increases driving safety and
reduces air resistance. If you then drive at
speeds below 93 mph (150 km/h), the rear
axle ride height is readjusted to the selected
suspension tuning.
RSport
Driving systems
Ra
door or the trunk lid/tailgate is opened
parked vehicle is unlocked
For larger level changes, the engine must be
running.
Rthe
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot
take account of road, weather and traffic
conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
ROnly
depress the accelerator pedal as far
as necessary when pulling away.
RAccelerate less when driving.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All
wheels must remain either on the ground
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
contact with the ground.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary.
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are
permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it
improves the traction of your vehicle
whenever a drive wheel spins due to
insufficient grip.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. When
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
parking space, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch
on the ignition
the transmission to position D, R or N
Rrelease the parking brake
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
Rshift
Z
Driving and parking
Load compensation
The vehicle can compensate differences in
the vehicle level by raising or lowering the
rear axle. This is the case, for example, if
people get out or if luggage is being loaded.
Load compensation takes place if:
193
194
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Range of the sensors
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into
consideration that are:
Rbelow
the detection range, e.g. people,
animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, truck overhangs or
loading ramps.
Example: top view
Front sensors
Center
Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners
Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
side (example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them
(Y page 315).
Center
Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners
Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center
Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
Corners
Approx. 6 in (approx.
15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the
relevant warning displays light up and a
warning tone sounds. If the distance falls
below the minimum, the distance may no
longer be shown.
Example: side view
Driving systems
Warning displays
195
Rsixth
segment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two
seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Warning display for the front area
: Segments on the left-hand side of the
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the center air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is
located on the headliner in the rear
compartment.
The warning display for each side of the
vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red
segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if
yellow segments showing operational
readiness = light up.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling
determine which warning display is active
when the engine is running.
Transmission
position
Warning display
D
Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle
is rolling
backwards
Rear and front areas
activated
P
No areas activated
: Indicator lamp
; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
deactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2
in the ignition lock.
Z
Driving and parking
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
196
Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC
X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
warning displays are lit.
specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the
indicator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC
X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 315).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol
indicates a suitable parking space. Active
steering intervention can assist you during
parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC
(Y page 193).
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. Make sure that
no persons, animals or objects are in the
maneuvering range.
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active
Parking Assist is also unavailable.
G WARNING
The vehicle swings out when parking and in
doing so could cross into the opposite lane.
This could result in a collision with another
road user. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users when
parking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or
cancel the Active Parking Assist parking
procedure.
! If unavoidable, you should drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at
a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
parking spaces which are not suitable for
parking, for example:
Rwhere
parking or stopping is prohibited
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
Ron
unsuitable surfaces
Driving systems
ROn
narrow roads, drive as close to the
parking space as possible.
RParking spaces that are littered or
overgrown might be identified or measured
incorrectly.
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
as such or be measured incorrectly.
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC
(Y page 195) warning messages during the
parking procedure.
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking
Assist will then be canceled.
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use
Active Parking Assist.
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the
vehicle.
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
Rthat
are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
not on the pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles.
G WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range,
Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
a risk of an accident.
If there are objects above the detection range,
stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
For further information on the detection
range (Y page 194).
Active Parking Assist does not support you
with parking spaces parallel to the direction
of travel if:
Rthe
parking space is on a curb
parking space appears blocked to the
system, for example, by foliage or grass
paving blocks
Rthe area that the vehicle needs to
maneuver is too small
Rthe parking space is bordered by an
obstacle, such as a tree, a post or a trailer
Rthe
Example: detected parking space
: Detected parking space on the left
; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is switched on
automatically when driving forwards. The
system is operational at speeds of up to
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in
operation, the system independently locates
and measures parking spaces on both sides
of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
Rthat
are parallel to the direction of travel
are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than
your vehicle
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as a
Rthat
Z
Driving and parking
Parking tips:
197
Driving systems
Driving and parking
198
status indicator in the instrument cluster.
When a parking space has been detected, an
arrow towards the right or the left also
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist
only displays parking spaces on the frontpassenger side. Parking spaces on the
driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn
signal on the driver's side is activated. When
parking on the driver's side, this must remain
switched on until you acknowledge the use of
Active Parking Assist by pressing the a
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
i Take note that Active Parking Assist
cannot measure the size of parking spaces
that are at right angles to the direction of
travel. You must decide for yourself
whether the vehicle will fit in the parking
space.
A parking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are
approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Parking
X
or
X
Stop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster.
X Shift the transmission to position R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X
To park using Active Parking Assist:
press the a button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction
display.
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake
at all times. When backing up, drive at a
speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist
will be canceled.
i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve
the best parking results by backing up as
far as possible. When doing so, also
observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
X
X
G WARNING
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by
intervening actively in the steering. If you do
not brake there is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself when
maneuvering and parking.
To cancel the procedure: press the
% button on the multifunction steering
wheel or pull away.
Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
Maneuvering may be required in tight
parking spaces.
The Park Assist Active Select D
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
X Shift the transmission to position D while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction
display.
i You will achieve the best results by
waiting for the steering procedure to
complete before pulling away.
Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
X
Driving systems
Parking tips:
RThe
way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent
on various factors. These include the
position and shape of the vehicles parked
in front and behind it and the conditions of
the location. It may be the case that Active
Parking Assist guides you too far into a
parking space, or not far enough into it. In
some cases, it may also lead you across or
onto the curb. If necessary, you should
cancel the parking procedure with Active
Parking Assist.
RYou can also engage forward gear
prematurely. The vehicle redirects and
does not drive as far into the parking space.
Should a gear be changed too early, the
parking procedure will be canceled. A
sensible parking position can no longer be
achieved from this position.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
time.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Park Assist Canceled
message appears in the multifunction
display.
or
X
Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
center console (Y page 195).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
The Park Assist Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display.
Active Parking Assist is canceled
automatically if:
Rthe
transmission is shifted too early.
using Active Parking Assist is no
longer possible.
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
÷ warning lamp lights up in the
instrument cluster.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
disappears and the multifunction display
shows the Park Assist Canceled
message.
If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must
steer again yourself.
Rparking
Rear view camera
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering and
parking. When maneuvering or parking, make
sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the area in which you are
maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function
in a limited manner:
Rif
the trunk lid/tailgate is open
heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rin
Z
Driving and parking
The Park Assist Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
Further transmission shifts may be
necessary.
As soon as the parking procedure is
complete, the Park Assist Finished
message appears in the multifunction
display. PARKTRONIC continues to be
available.
X Maneuver if necessary.
X Always observe the warning messages
displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 195).
199
200
Driving systems
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Driving and parking
Rif
the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this event, have the camera position and
setting checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
General notes
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear"
setting is active in COMAND, see the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
X Engage reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND display with guide lines.
X
To deactivate: the rear view camera is
deactivated if you:
Rshift
the transmission to position P
33 ft (10 m) forwards
Rshift the transmission from R to another
position after 15 seconds
Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph
(10 km/h)
Rdrive
Displays in the COMAND display
Example: Coupe
Rear view camera : is located in the handle
strip of the trunk lid.
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind
your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND
display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
i The text of messages shown in the
COMAND display depends on the language
setting. The following are examples of rear
view camera messages in the COMAND
display.
The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
Rvery
close to the rear bumper
the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
Runder
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe
bumper of a parked vehicle
drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the
bottom-most guideline.
Rthe
: Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
; White guide line without turning the
steering wheel, vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors (static)
= CLS Coupe: yellow guide line for the
vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors, for current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking tires at current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Additional messages for vehicles with
PARKTRONIC
: Front warning display
; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
operational readiness indicator
= Rear warning display
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if
PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 193), an
additional operational readiness indicator will
appear in COMAND display ;. If the
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the
COMAND display.
A Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
D Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the
transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Z
201
Driving and parking
Driving systems
Driving systems
202
"Reverse parking" function
Driving and parking
Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
Reverse perpendicular parking with the
steering wheel at an angle
: Parking space marking
: White guide line without turning the
steering wheel, vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors (static)
; CLS Coupe: yellow guide line for the
vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors, for current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
= Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
? Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 200).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide lines :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide lines : as a guide,
carefully reverse until you reach the end
position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost
parallel in the parking space.
X
; CLS Coupe: yellow guide line for the
vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors, for current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 200).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the
parking space until yellow guide line ;
reaches parking space marking :.
X Keep the steering wheel in that position
and back up carefully.
X
Backing up with the steering wheel turned
: CLS Coupe: yellow guide line for the
vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors, for current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
Driving systems
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly
in front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as
possible.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a
substitute for a well-rested and attentive
driver.
General notes
Driving to the final position
: White guide line at current steering wheel
angle
; Parking space marking
X
Turn the steering wheel to the center
position while the vehicle is stationary.
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
It is active in the range between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration on the part of the driver, it
suggests you take a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
the following criteria into account:
Ryour
personal driving style, e.g. steering
characteristics
Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length
of journey
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
not occur at all:
Rif
: Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
; White lane with steering wheel straight
= End of parking space
X
Back up carefully until you have reached
the final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
the parking space.
the road condition is poor, e.g. if the
surface is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than
112 mph (180 km/h)
Rif you are currently using COMAND or
making a telephone call with it
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
Z
Driving and parking
X
203
Driving systems
204
Warning and display messages in the
multifunction display
Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 228).
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be
warned no sooner than 20 minutes after
your journey has begun. You then hear an
intermittent warning tone twice and the
Attention Assist: Drowsiness
detected message appears in the
multifunction display.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Press the a button to confirm the
message.
Driving and parking
X
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
do not take a break, you will be warned again
after 15 minutes at the earliest. The
precondition for this is that
ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
À symbol and OFF appear in the
multifunction display in the assistance
graphics display when the engine is running.
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you
continue your journey and starts assessing
your tiredness again if:
your driving style to suit the prevailing road
and traffic conditions.
The system may be impaired or may not
function if:
Rthere
is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or spray
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill
gradients
Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or
inoperative if:
Rpedestrians
are partially or entirely
obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles
Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night
View Assist Plus display is incomplete or
interrupted, e.g. by powerful light
reflections
Rpedestrians do not contrast adequately
from the background
Rpedestrians are not in an upright position,
e.g. sitting, squatting or lying
Ryou
switch off the engine.
take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break.
Ryou
Night View Assist Plus
Important safety notes
Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not
a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely
on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
good time. Drive carefully and always adapt
In addition to the illumination provided by the
normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus
uses infrared light to illuminate the road.
Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up
the infrared light and displays a monochrome
image in COMAND. The image displayed in
COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by highbeam headlamps. This enables you to see the
road's course and any obstacles in good time.
If pedestrian recognition is activated,
pedestrians recognized by the system are
Driving systems
i Infrared light is not visible to the human
i The infrared headlamps only switch on
when the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This
means that you do not have the full visual
range while the vehicle is stationary and
cannot check whether Night View Assist
Plus is working.
Pedestrian recognition
eye and therefore does not glare. Night
View Assist Plus can therefore remain
switched on even if there is oncoming
traffic.
Activating Night View Assist Plus
Activation conditions
You can only activate Night View Assist Plus
if:
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Rit is dark.
Rthe light switch is in the à or L
position.
Rreverse gear has not been engaged.
Activating Night View Assist Plus
: Night View Assist Plus display
; Pedestrian recognized
= Framing
? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition
i Animals are not recognized by pedestrian
recognition.
Night View Assist Plus is able to recognize
pedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. a
silhouette in the shape of a person.
Pedestrian recognition is then switched on
automatically:
Rif
Night View Assist Plus is activated
Rif you are driving faster than approximately
6 mph (10 km/h)
surroundings are dark, e.g. when
driving outside built-up areas without
street lighting
If pedestrian recognition is active,
symbol ? appears. If pedestrians are
detected, they are highlighted with framing
=. If the pedestrian recognition system has
brought a pedestrian to your attention, look
through the windshield to evaluate the
situation. The actual distance to objects and
Rthe
X
X
Make sure that COMAND is switched on.
Press button :.
The Night View Assist Plus display appears
in the COMAND display.
You can read about how to adjust the
brightness of the COMAND display in the
COMAND operating instructions.
Z
Driving and parking
highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus
display.
Light from the headlamps of oncoming
vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist
Plus display in the multifunction display. This
is also the case if you cannot switch on the
high-beam headlamps due to oncoming
traffic.
205
206
Driving systems
Driving and parking
pedestrians cannot be gaged accurately by
looking at a screen.
It may be the case that objects are highlighted
as well as pedestrians.
Fogged up or dirty windshield
G WARNING
Always remember that you must concentrate
primarily on driving the vehicle. A driver's
attention to the road must always be his/her
primary focus when driving. For your safety
and the safety of others: stop the vehicle
before attempting to clean fogged up
windows or the windshield area in front of the
Night View Assist Plus camera.
Please remember that when your vehicle is
traveling at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h) it covers a distance
of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.
If the windshield in front of the camera is
fogged up or dirty on the inside or outside, the
Night View Assist Plus display is affected.
X To defrost: check the automatic air
conditioning settings (Y page 140) and fold
down the camera cover (Y page 316).
X To defrost the inside of the windshield:
fold down the camera cover (Y page 316)
and clean the windshield (Y page 314).
Driving systems
207
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The picture quality of
Night View Assist Plus
has deteriorated.
The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.
X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 126).
The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a
car wash.
X Clean the windshield (Y page 314).
There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.
X Replace the windshield.
The windshield is fogged up on the inside.
X Defrost the windshield (Y page 140).
The windshield is iced up.
X De-ice the windshield (Y page 139).
There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.
X Clean the inside of the windshield (Y page 314).
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 207) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 209).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the
corresponding turn signal to change lanes,
you will also receive a visual and audible
collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses
sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring
purposes.
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar
sensor system must be operational.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles
overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i USA only:
Z
Driving and parking
Problems with Night View Assist Plus
Driving and parking
208
Driving systems
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rdirt
on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
snow or spray
Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or
bicycles
Rthe road has very wide lanes
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may
be the case if there are vehicles driving at the
inner edge of their lanes.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings
may be issued in error when
driving close to crash barriers or similar
solid lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
extended period next to long vehicles, such
as trucks.
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
are integrated into the sides of the rear
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
The sensors must not be covered, for
example by cycle racks or overhanging loads.
Following a severe impact or in the event of
damage to the bumpers, have the function of
the sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
not work properly.
Indicator and warning display
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to
10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at
speeds below approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up
yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).
At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) the
Driving systems
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected
are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 228) is activated in the on-board
computer.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
recognize lane markings.
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning
give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
Rnot
G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There
is a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane
Keeping Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the
vehicle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not
function if:
Rthere
is poor visibility, e.g. due to
insufficient illumination of the road, or due
to snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
construction work
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Z
Driving and parking
indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist
is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the
corresponding side lights up red. This warning
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
209
210
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Rthe
distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle with camera :, which is
mounted at the top of the windshield. Lane
Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the
road and warns you before you leave your
lane unintentionally.
If you have chosen the function Display
Unit Speed-/Odometer:(Y page 229) and
selected the display unit km in the on-board
computer, Active Lane Keeping Assist
supports you from a speed of 60 km/h. If the
miles display unit is selected, the assistance
range begins at 40 mph.
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
by means of intermittent vibration in the
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 229).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 227) are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Standard
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Adaptive
If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when
necessary and in good time if you cross the
lane marking, the system recognizes certain
conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou
approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
highway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe
Ryou
road has narrow lanes.
cut the corner on a bend.
Active Driving Assistance package
General notes
The Active Driving Assistance package
consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 177),
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 211) and
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 214).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
system, pointed toward the rear of the
vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the
vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A
warning display in the exterior mirrors draws
your attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the
corresponding turn signal to change lane, you
will also receive an optical and audible
warning. If a risk of lateral collision is
detected, corrective braking may help you
avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist
evaluates the space in the direction of travel
and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active
Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which
are pointed in the direction of travel.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must
be:
Ractivated(Y
page 232)
Roperational
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is
not a substitute for attentive driving.
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles
overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may
neither give warnings nor intervene in such
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
integrated into the front and rear bumpers
and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make
sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
rear sensors must not be covered, for
example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo.
Following a severe impact or in the event of
damage to the bumpers, have the function of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified
Z
211
Driving and parking
Driving systems
212
Driving systems
specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist
may otherwise no longer work properly.
Driving and parking
Monitoring area
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
traffic situations and road users. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient
distance on the side for other traffic or
obstacles.
driving in the middle of their lane. This may
be the case if there are vehicles at the edge
of their lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings
may be issued in error when
driving close to crash barriers or similar
solid lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
extended period next to long vehicles, such
as trucks.
Indicator and warning display
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and
directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the
diagram.
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in
the case of:
Rdirt
on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or
spray
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated or indicated with a delay.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect
narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or
bicycles, or may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at
speeds below approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
are then not indicated.
When active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
up yellow at speeds of up to
20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and
active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the
corresponding side lights up red. This warning
is always given when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind
Spot Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change
lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side
monitoring range, you receive a visual and
acoustic collision warning. You then hear a
double warning tone and red warning
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,
detected vehicles are indicated by the
flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no
further warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
G WARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake
application. Always maintain a safe distance
at the sides.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
course-correcting brake application is carried
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
collision.
If a course-correcting brake application
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
sounds. In addition, the display shown in the
lower image appears in the multifunction
display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. An
inappropriate course-correcting brake
application may be interrupted at any time if
you steer slightly in the opposite direction or
accelerate, for example.
The course-correcting brake application is
available in the speed range between
20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a coursecorrecting brake application adapted to the
driving situation occurs if:
Rthere
are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your
vehicle.
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 232) and Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 228) are activated in the on-board
computer.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Z
213
Driving and parking
Driving systems
214
Driving systems
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Driving and parking
General notes
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot
continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
Rgive
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
in front of your vehicle by means of
camera : at the top of the windshield. Active
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on
the road and warns you before you leave your
lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the
warning, a lane-correcting application of the
brakes can bring the vehicle back into the
original lane.
If you have chosen the function Display
Unit Speed-/Odometer:(Y page 229) and
selected the display unit km in the on-board
computer, Active Lane Keeping Assist
supports you from a speed of 60 km/h. If
miles is selected as the display unit, the
assistance range begins at 40 mph.
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must
be operational.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the
risk of accident nor override the laws of
physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot
take into account road, weather or traffic
conditions. It cannot detect possible road and
traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist
is only an aid. You are responsible for the
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
Terminate the intervention in a non-critical
driving situation.
The system may be impaired or may not
function if:
Rthere
is poor visibility, e.g. due to
insufficient illumination of the road, or due
to snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear
bumper or in the radiator grill are dirty, e.g.
due to snow
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
construction work
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe
road is narrow and winding
are strong shadows cast on the lane
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane
and there are broken lane markings detected,
no lane-correcting brake application is made.
Rthere
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
by means of intermittent vibration in the
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Lane-correcting brake application
G WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
you or makes a lane-correcting brake
application.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
cases, the system may make an inappropriate
brake application, e.g. after intentionally
driving over a solid lane marking. There is a
risk of an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
there is sufficient distance on the side for
other traffic or obstacles.
If you leave your lane, under certain
circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly
on one side. This is meant to assist you in
bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
display : appears in the multifunction
display.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
200 km/h).
A lane-correcting brake application can only
be made after driving over a solid,
recognizable lane marking. Before this, a
warning must be given by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel.
In addition, a lane with lane markings on both
sides must be recognized. The brake
application also slightly reduces vehicle
speed.
i A further lane-correcting brake
application can only occur after your
vehicle has returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs
if:
Ryou
clearly and actively steer, brake or
accelerate.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Ryou have switched on the turn signals.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.
RESP® is switched off.
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
been detected and displayed.
Active Lane Keeping Assist may is unable to
detect other road or traffic conditions. An
inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you:
Z
215
Driving and parking
Driving systems
Driving and parking
216
Driving systems
Rsteer
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ruse
slightly in the opposite direction
a turn signal
Rclearly brake or accelerate
A lane-correcting brake application is
interrupted automatically if:
Ryou
Ra
driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 229).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 227) are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
If Adaptive is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid
an obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when
necessary and in good time if you cross the
lane marking, the system recognizes certain
conditions and warns you accordingly.
approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
highway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe
Ryou
road has narrow lanes.
cut the corner on a bend.
Useful information ............................
Important safety notes ....................
Displays and operation ....................
Menus and submenus ......................
Display messages .............................
Indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................
218
218
219
222
237
264
On-board computer and displays
217
On-board computer and displays
218
Important safety notes
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and
communication equipment integrated in the
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or
malfunctioned, you may not recognize
function restrictions in systems relevant to
safety. The operating safety of your vehicle
may be impaired. There is a risk of an
accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the
multifunction display. You should therefore
make sure your vehicle is operating safely at
all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not
operating safely may cause an accident.
For an overview, see the instrument panel
illustration (Y page 31).
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster
: Speedometer with segments (Y page 220)
; Multifunction display (Y page 221)
= Tachometer (Y page 219)
? Coolant temperature (Y page 219)
A Fuel gauge
Coolant temperature display
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is
overheated or when there is a fire in the
engine compartment could expose you to hot
gases or other service products. There is a
risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
! A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over
248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
219
The coolant temperature gauge is in the
instrument cluster on the left-hand side
(Y page 31).
Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant
temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Z
On-board computer and displays
220
Displays and operation
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
The outside temperature display is in the
multifunction display (Y page 221).
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RCruise
control activated (Y page 175):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 177):
One or two segments in the set speed
range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
up.
: Multifunction display
; Right control panel
= Switches on the Voice Control System;
see the separate operating instructions
? Back button
A Left control panel
X
To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Left control panel
=
;
RCalls
9
:
Press briefly:
9
:
a
up the menu and menu bar
RScrolls
in lists
RSelects a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects a
stored station, an audio track or
a video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or telephone
number
W
X
RAdjusts
8
RMute
Back button
%
the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects
an audio track or a video scene
using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
RConfirms
Press briefly:
RBack
RSwitches
off the Voice Control
System; see the separate
operating instructions
RHides display messages/calls
up the last Trip menu function
used
RExits the telephone book/redial
memory
Press and hold:
RIn
the volume
%
Press and hold:
RCalls
up the standard display in
the Trip menu
Multifunction display
a selection/display
message
the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
RIn
Right control panel
~
6
RRejects
or ends a call
RExits phone book/redial
memory
RMakes
or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
: Text field
; Menu bar
= Drive program (Y page 156)
? Transmission position (Y page 155)
A Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 230)
X
To show menu bar;: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds.
Z
221
On-board computer and displays
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
222
Menus and submenus
Text field : shows the selected menu or
submenu as well as display messages.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
Z
Shift recommendation (Y page 161)
XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 196)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 122)
¤ ECO start/stop function
(Y page 150)
ë HOLD function (Y page 186)
Trip menu
Standard display
X
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to call up the menu bar and
select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 220).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip
menu (Y page 222)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 224)
RAudio menu (Y page 225)
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 226)
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 227)
RServ. menu (Y page 229)
RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 229)
RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 234)
Press and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the Trip menu with
trip odometer : and odometer ; is
shown.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
Example: trip computer "From Start"
: Distance
; Time
= Average speed
? Average fuel consumption
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press 9 or : to select From Start
or From Reset.
X
The values in the From Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the From Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 223).
The From Start trip computer is
automatically reset when:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The From Reset trip computer is
automatically reset if the value exceeds
9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.
Digital speedometer
ECO display
: Shift recommendation (Y page 161)
; Digital speedometer
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
X
Example: ECO display
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Select ECO DISPLAY with 9 or :.
X
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be
automatically reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 170).
i If the gearshift recommendation is shown
at the top of the multifunction display, it is
no longer shown at the bottom of the
multifunction display.
Resetting values
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press the a button.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
X
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
current fuel consumption (not for AMG
vehicles) and the approximate range.
X
The approximate range that can be covered
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount
of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
a vehicle being refueled C instead of the
range.
You can reset the values of the following
functions:
RTrip
odometer
Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
R"From
Z
223
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
224
Menus and submenus
i When you reset the values in the "ECO
display", the values in the trip computer
"From start" are likewise reset. When you
reset the values in the trip computer "From
start", the values in the "ECO display" are
likewise reset.
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
information on navigation, see the separate
operating instructions.
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
: Road into which the change of direction
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance
indicator shortens towards the top of the
display as you approach the point of the
announced change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
: Direction of travel
; Current road
: Road into which the change of direction
Route guidance active
; Distance to change of direction and visual
No change of direction announced
leads
distance display
= New lane during a change of direction
? Uninterrupted lane
A Lane recommendation
B Change-of-direction symbol
: Distance to the destination
; Distance to the next change of direction
= Current road
? "Follow the road's course" symbol
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation = for the next change
of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
map.
Other status indicators of the
navigation system
RO: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
Route... or Calculating Route:
calculating a new route
ROff Map or Off Road: the vehicle position
is outside the area of the digital map (offmap position).
RNo Route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
i For information on switching waveband
and storing stations; see the separate
operating instructions.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
For more information on satellite radio
operation, see the separate operating
instructions.
RNew
Operating an audio player or audio
media
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
Example: CD/DVD changer display
: Current title
: Waveband
; Station frequency with memory position
i Station ; is displayed with the station
frequency or station name. The memory
position is only displayed along with
station ; if this has been stored.
Switch on the audio system or COMAND
and select Radio; see the separate
operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select a stored station: briefly press
the 9 or : button.
X To select a station from the station
list: press and briefly hold the 9
or : button.
If no station list is received:
X To select a station using the station
search: press and briefly hold the 9
or : button.
X
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle.
Switch on COMAND and activate audio
CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the
separate operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired
track : has been reached.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
audio drives or data carriers support this
function.
X
If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
will show the number and title of the track.
The current track does not appear in audio
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
Z
225
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
226
Video DVD operation
Establish a Bluetooth® connection to
COMAND; see the separate operating
instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
X
You will see one of the following display
messages in the multifunction display:
Example: CD/DVD changer display
: Current scene
Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;
see the separate operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired
scene : has been reached.
X
Telephone menu
Introduction
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and
communication equipment integrated in the
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the
legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the
separate operating instructions).
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
RPhone
READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
RPhone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching
for a network.
Accepting a call
Example: incoming call
X
Press the 6 button on the steering
wheel to accept an incoming call.
If someone calls you when you are in the
Tel menu, a display message appears in the
multifunction display.
You can accept a call even if you are not in
the Tel menu.
Rejecting or ending a call
X
Press the ~ button on the steering
wheel.
You can end or reject a call even if you are not
in the Tel menu.
Dialing a number from the phone book
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
or
To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the 9 or : button for longer than
one second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start
dialing.
or
X To exit the telephone book: press the
~ or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
X
Redialing
In the DriveAssist menu, you have the
following options:
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
(Y page 227)
RActivating/deactivating
ESP®(Y page 227)
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
(Y page 228)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST (Y page 228)
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 228)
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 229)
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
Displaying the assistance graphic
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start
dialing.
or
X To exit the redial memory: press the
~ or % button.
X
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Assist. Graphic.
X Press the a button.
The DISTRONIC PLUS assistance graphic
appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 184).
X
Deactivating/activating ESP®
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section in the description of ESP
(Y page 68).
Z
227
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
228
Menus and submenus
G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased
risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
following situations:
Rwhen
using snow chains
deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG
vehicles (Y page 70).
For further information about ESP®, see
(Y page 68).
X Start the engine.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
ESP.
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
Rin
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up
continuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 269).
Observe the information on display messages
(Y page 238).
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®
Brake
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
PRE-SAFE Brake.
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
X
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol in
the multifunction display.
For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,
see (Y page 72).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Attention
Assist.
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
X
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
À symbol and OFF appear in the
multifunction display in the assistance
display when the engine is running.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 203).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot Asst.
X
Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
X
If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors
Deactivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst.
Sensors Deactivated message appears,
the radar sensor system is deactivated.
X Switch on the radar sensor system
(Y page 232).
For further information about Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 207).
For further information about Active Blind
Spot Assist, see (Y page 211).
RCalling
up display messages in message
memory (Y page 237)
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 342)
RChecking the tire pressure electronically
(Y page 342)
RCalling up the service due date
(Y page 310)
Settings menu
Introduction
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keep. Asst.
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Standard or Adaptive.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (Y page 209).
For further information about Active Lane
Keeping Assist, see (Y page 214).
Maintenance menu
In the Sett. menu, you have the following
options:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 229)
RChanging the light settings (Y page 230)
RChanging the vehicle settings
(Y page 232)
RChanging the convenience settings
(Y page 233)
RRestoring the factory settings
(Y page 234)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for
distance
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function allows you to choose whether
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles
in the multifunction display.
In the Serv. menu, you have the following
options:
Z
229
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
230
You can determine whether the multifunction
display shows some messages in miles or
kilometers.
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function.
You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
The selected unit of measurement for
distance applies to:
Rthe
digital speedometer in the Trip menu
and the trip odometer
Rtrip computer
Rcurrent consumption and the range
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi
menu
Rcruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
Rodometer
Selecting the permanent display function
You can determine whether the multifunction
display permanently shows your speed or the
outside temperature.
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display: function.
You will see the selected setting Outside
Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]
(USA)/Speedometer [mph] (Canada).
X Press the a button to save the setting.
i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph
(Canada).
Lights
Setting the brightness of the instrument
cluster lighting and switches
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle
interior can be adjusted using the
Brightness Display/Switches: function.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Brightness Display/Switches:
function.
You will see the selected setting.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Level 1 to
Level 5 (bright).
X Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
L, the brightness is dependent upon
the brightness of the ambient light.
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
automatically controls the brightness of
the multifunction display.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument
cluster are not illuminated.
X
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
i This function is not available in Canada.
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Day
Lights: function.
If the Day Lights: have been switched on,
the cone of light and the W symbol in
the multifunction display are shown in red.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Further information on daytime running
lamps (Y page 117).
Setting the brightness of the ambient
lighting
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light +/-. function.
You will see the selected setting.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Off to Level
5 (bright).
X Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Setting the ambient lighting color
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Ambient Light Color function.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set the
color to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR.
X Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Activating/deactivating surround
lighting and exterior lighting delayed
switch-off
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the
Surround Lighting function.
When the Surround Lighting function is
activated, the light cone and the area
around the vehicle are displayed in red in
the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the
exterior lighting temporarily:
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
deactivated.
X
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
reactivated the next time you start the
engine.
If you have activated the Surround
Lighting function and the light switch is set
to Ã, the following functions are activated
when it is dark:
RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,
the surround lighting is switched off and
the automatic headlamp mode is activated
(Y page 117).
RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for 60seconds
after the engine is switched off. If you close
all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior
lighting goes off after 5 seconds.
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
when the surround lighting and delayed
Z
231
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
232
Menus and submenus
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the
following light up:
RParking lamps
RLow-beam headlamps
RDaytime running lamps
RSide marker lamps
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior
lighting delayed switch-off
If you activate the Interior Lighting
Delay function, the interior lighting remains
on for 20seconds after you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Light.
Delay function.
When the Interior Lighting Delay
function is activated, the vehicle interior is
displayed in red in the multifunction
display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Auto.
Door Locks function.
When the Automatic Door Lock function
is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
in red in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
For further information on the automatic
locking feature, see (Y page 83).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
vehicle.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction
display lights up red.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
system
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
The following systems are switched off when
the radar sensor system is deactivated:
RDISTRONIC
PLUS (Y page 177)
PLUS (Y page 67)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 207)
RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 211)
RBAS
Convenience
Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature
G WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is
making adjustments, make sure that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the
steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress
one of the memory function position
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel
adjustment in the opposite direction to that
in which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Easy Entry/Exit: function.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is
activated, the vehicle steering wheel is
displayed in red in the multifunction
display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Belt Adjustment function.
When the Belt Adjustment function is
activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed
in red in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
For further information on belt adjustment,
see (Y page 57).
Switching the fold-in mirrors with the
locking feature on/off
This function is only available on vehicles with
the memory function (Y page 112).
When you activate the Auto. Mirror
Folding function, the exterior mirrors are
folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you
unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the
exterior mirrors fold out again.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Auto.
Mirror Folding function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is
displayed in red in the multifunction
display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature (Y page 108).
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors by pressing button :, the exterior
Z
233
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
234
mirrors will not fold out automatically
(Y page 110).
You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
using button :.
Restoring the factory settings
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select
No or Yes.
X Press a to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
X
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Lights submenu is
only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu in AMG vehicles
AMG displays
Upshift indicator UP= indicates that the
engine has reached the overrevving range
when in the manual gearshift program.
Upshift indicator UP= fades out other
messages until you have shifted up.
When the engine oil temperature is below
176 ‡ (80 †) the oil temperature is shown in
blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during
this time.
SETUP
: Drive program (C/SS+/M)
; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling
mode (SPORT)
= Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/
SPORT+)
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the
suspension tuning.
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until
SETUP is displayed.
or
X Briefly press the AMG button on the center
console (Y page 191).
X
: Digital speedometer
; Gear indicator
= Upshift indicator
? Engine oil temperature
A Coolant temperature
B ECO start/stop function status indicator
(Y page 151)
X
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
Menus and submenus
Starting a new lap
On-board computer and displays
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
: RACETIMER
: Lap
; RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function
on public roads.
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or if the SmartKey is in
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER is shown.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
X
Press a to confirm New Lap.
i It is possible to store a maximum of
sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be
completed with Finish Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER
X
Displaying the intermediate time
Press the % button on the steering
wheel.
X Press a to confirm Yes.
X
The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you
stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the
SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press
a to confirm Start, timing is continued.
Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. Time.
X Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time is displayed for five
seconds.
X
235
Resetting the current lap
X Stop the RACETIMER.
X Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Z
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
236
Deleting all laps
Lap statistics
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER
is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap
does not have to be reset.
X Reset the current lap.
X Press a to confirm Reset.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
: Lap
Overall statistics
: RACETIMER overall evaluation
; Total time driven
= Average speed
? Distance covered
A Maximum speed
This function is shown if you have stored at
least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation is shown.
X
; Lap time
= Average lap speed
? Lap length
A Top speed during lap
This function is only available if you have
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing
symbol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
X
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD
function (Y page 186)
page 167)
RParking (Y
Hiding display messages
X
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the
messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can
call up the display messages:
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
X
Z
237
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
238
Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and
hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Rself-diagnosis
Rthe
is not yet complete.
on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering
movements, at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X
X
!÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start
assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering
movements, at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
239
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
240
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
T!
÷
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F(USA
only)J(Canada
You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
X Release the parking brake.
$(USA
only)J(Canada
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
sounds.
only)
Release Parking
Brake
only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Brake Pad
Wear
G
mbrace Inoperative
One or more main features of the mbrace system are
malfunctioning.
X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE
Functions
Currently Limited
See Operator's
Manual
PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
Rfunction
is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Rthe
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 315).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 70).
X
PRE-SAFE
Functions Limited
See Operator's
Manual
PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS
or the distance warning signal may also have failed.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
241
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
242
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
cluster.
SRS Malfunction
Service Required
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 41).
6
Front Left
Malfunction
Service Required
or Front Right
Malfunction
Service Required
6
SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6
warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Rear Left
Malfunction
Service Required
or Rear Right
Malfunction
Service Required
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window
curtain air bag.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required
or Right Side
Curtain Airbag
malfunction
Service Required
G WARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled
See Operator's
Manual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
deactivated during the journey, although:
Ran adult
or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the frontpassenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may
interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag
may not be triggered in the event of an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the frontpassenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 47).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
Z
243
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
244
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,
see (Y page 47).
Front Passenger
Airbag Enabled
See Operator's
Manual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
enabled during the journey, even though:
Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the
system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger
seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag
may be triggered unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant
Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag
and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 47).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,
see (Y page 47).
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left
Cornering Light or
Check Right
Cornering Light
b
Check Left Low
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam
b
Check Rear Left
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right
Turn Signal
The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
245
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
246
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right
Turn Signal
b
Check Left Mirror
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
b
Check Center Brake
Lamp
b
Check Left Tail
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail
and Brake Lamps
b
Check Left High
Beam or Check
Right High Beam
b
Rear Fog Lamp
b
Check Front Left
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right
Parking Lamp
b
Check Left Reverse
Lamp or Check
Right Reverse Lamp
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is
defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The left or right-hand high beam is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The rear fog lamp is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b
Check Rear
Sidemarker
Check Rear
Sidemarker
Left
Lamp or
Right
Lamp
b
Check Left Daytime
Running Light or
Check Right
Daytime Running
Light
b
Active Light
System Inoperative
b
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b
Switch Off Lights
247
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The active light function is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The exterior lighting is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The light sensor is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Z
248
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily
inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe
windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
Rvisibility
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,
the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is
displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant
Level See
Operator's Manual
! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
?
The fan motor is faulty.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 308).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn
Engine Off
G WARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).
Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Z
249
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
250
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
Ra
defective alternator
torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
Ra
If the poly-V-belt is torn:
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
4
Check Engine Oil
Level At Next
Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(Y page 307).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 308).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
4
AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
Check Engine Oil
(Y page 307).
Level (Add 1 quart)
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 308).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
8
Fuel Level Low
C
8
Gas Cap Loose
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
X
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
À
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue
or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
also sounds.
X If necessary, take a break.
Attention Assist:
Take a Break!
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À
Attention Assist
Inoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
251
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
252
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¨
Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle Rising
¨
Vehicle Rising
Please Wait
¨
Stop Vehicle
Vehicle Too Low
The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A
warning tone also sounds.
X Do not pull away.
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
period.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front
fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement
is too large.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the
vehicle.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
¨
Malfunction
ë
Off
Radar Sensors
Deactivated See
Operator's Manual
The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling
characteristics may be affected.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 186).
The radar sensor system is deactivated.
X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 232).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Lane Keeping
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
or Active Lane
Keeping Assist
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe
windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Rvisibility
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Clean the windshield.
X
Lane Keeping
Assist
Inoperative or
Active Lane
Keeping Assist
Inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
253
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
254
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Blind Spot Assist
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
or Active Blind
Spot Assist
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily
inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe
sensors are dirty.
is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Rfunction
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Clean the sensors (Y page 315).
X Restart the engine.
X
Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative or
Active Blind Spot
Assist Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist
Canceled
The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel
while steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the
multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.
X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 196).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Park Assist
Inoperative
You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after
approximately ten minutes (Y page 196).
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Switch off and restart the engine.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist
Finished
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off
DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 177).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now
Available
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been
temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 177).
Z
255
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
256
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUS
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
Rfunction
is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Rthe
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 315).
X Restart the engine.
X
DISTRONIC PLUS
Inoperative
DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.
The following may have also failed:
RBAS
PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)
Brake
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
RPRE-SAFE®
DISTRONIC PLUS
Suspended
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS
- - - mph
An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 177).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Cruise Control
Inoperative
Cruise control is defective.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
- - - mph
A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 175).
Z
257
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
258
Display messages
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
Tire Pressure Soon
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey
may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 321).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire
pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 342).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display
message and has not been restarted since.
Then Restart Run
Flat Indicator
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 342).
Run Flat Indicator
Inoperative
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rectify
Tire Pressure
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 342).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 345).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey
may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 321).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 342).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning
Tire Malfunction
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra
flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 321).
Ryou
Z
259
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
260
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
Currently
malfunctioning.
Unavailable
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
TirePress.
Sensor(s) Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
Inoperative
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position R or D.
To Start Engine
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction
The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
being charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Apply Brake
to Shift from 'P'
You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Risk of Rolling
Away
Vehicle Not in 'P'
The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N
or D.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Service Required
Do Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
X
Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P'
when Vehicle is
Stationary
The vehicle is moving.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
N
the trunk lid is open.
X Close the trunk lid.
M
The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Close the hood.
C
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X Close all the doors.
_
The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or
right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Rear Left Backrest
Not Latched or
Rear Right
Backrest Not
Latched
_
Lock Seat Backrest
Front Left or Lock
Seat Backrest
Front Right
The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A
warning tone also sounds.
X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Z
261
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
262
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ð
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
Power Steering
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
G WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/
receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
¥
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
X Add washer fluid (Y page 309).
Check Washer Fluid
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
Â
Take Your Key from
Ignition
Â
Obtain a New Key
Â
Replace Key Battery
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
X Remove the SmartKey.
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.
X Change the batteries (Y page 79).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and
is only a reminder.
You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
Don't Forget Your
Key
Â
Key Not Detected
(red display message)
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running
because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â
Key Not Detected
(white display
message)
The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.
X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
functions in the vehicle.
If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X
Â
Key Detected in
Vehicle
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
Z
263
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
264
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Remove 'Start'
Button and Insert
Key
The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.
KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A
warning tone also sounds.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Â
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close Doors to
Lock Vehicle
Indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps
overview
L
Low-beam headlamps
(Y page 118)
T
Parking lamps (Y page 118)
K
High-beam headlamps
(Y page 119)
#!
Turn signal (Y page 119)
ü
Seat belts (Y page 265)
$ (USA)
Brakes (Y page 266)
J (Canada) Brakes (Y page 266)
!
ABS (Y page 267)
÷
ESP®(Y page 269)
å
ESP® OFF (Y page 269)
M
SPORT handling mode in
AMG vehicles (Y page 270)
6
SRS (Y page 272)
;
Check Engine (Y page 273)
8
Reserve fuel (Y page 273)
?
Coolant (Y page 273)
·
Distance warning signal
(Y page 275)
h
Tire pressure monitor
(Y page 276)
Safety
Seat belts
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
to fasten their seat belts.
After starting the
engine, the red seat
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
ü
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).
engine, the red seat
The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds
for up to six seconds.
ü
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).
warning lamp lights up
The warning lamp goes out.
after the engine starts,
as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed.
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
The red seat belt
warning lamp flashes
and an intermittent
audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You
are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. You are driving
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than
15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Z
265
On-board computer and displays
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
266
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
Safety systems
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only)
G WARNING
J (Canada only)
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking
The red brake system characteristics may be affected.
warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident.
while the engine is
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
running. A warning tone
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds.
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
$ (USA only)
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only)
G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
There is a risk of an accident.
while the engine is
running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds.
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the
malfunction.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a
malfunction. BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic
Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
function and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for
example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.
Z
267
On-board computer and displays
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
268
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD
(electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,
PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist are therefore
also deactivated, for example.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis
is not yet complete.
on-board voltage may be insufficient.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Rthe
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight
steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running. A
warning tone also
sounds.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,
BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
function and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
֌!
The red brake warning
lamp, the yellow ESP®
and ESP® OFF warning
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is
running.
ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,
BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
269
On-board computer and displays
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
270
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).
The yellow ESP®
warning lamp flashes
while the vehicle is in
motion.
å
ESP® is deactivated.
ESP®
The yellow
OFF
G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
®
®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X
If ESP® cannot be activated:
X Drive on carefully.
X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
M
AMG vehicles only:
The yellow SPORT
handling mode warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the
conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT
handling mode" section (Y page 70).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
֌
ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The yellow ESP® and
ESP® OFF warning
lamps are lit while the
engine is running.
֌
ESP®
The yellow
and
ESP® OFF warning
lamps are lit while the
engine is running.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
temporarily unavailable.
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight
steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Z
271
On-board computer and displays
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
272
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only)
You are driving with the parking brake applied.
X Release the parking brake.
J (Canada only)
The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
The red brake system
warning lamp comes on
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
6
The red SRS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System).
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Drive on carefully.
X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 41).
Engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
The yellow Check
Engine warning lamp
lights up while the
engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin
the engine management
the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Rin
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning
lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in
these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running.
8
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the vehicle is in
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
motion.
cap.
In addition, the ;
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
Check Engine warning
workshop.
lamp may light up.
?
The red coolant
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running and the coolant
temperature gauge is
at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is
defective.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
273
On-board computer and displays
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
274
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The red coolant
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is
running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be
malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 308).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
?
The red coolant
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is
running. A warning tone
also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The
airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level
may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 308).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next
qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
X
Driving systems
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
·
The red distance
warning lamp lights up
while the vehicle is in
motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
selected.
X Increase the distance.
·
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
of travel at too high a speed.
The red distance
warning lamp lights up X Be prepared to brake immediately.
while the vehicle is in
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
motion. A warning tone
brake or take evasive action.
also sounds.
Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72).
Z
275
On-board computer and displays
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
276
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
Tires
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp
G WARNING
(pressure loss/
With
tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
malfunction) is lit.
following hazards:
Rthey
may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 321).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 342).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
The yellow tire pressure
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/
malfunction) flashes for
approximately one
minute and then
remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
277
Stowage and features
Useful information ............................ 278
Stowage areas .................................. 278
Features ............................................. 284
278
Stowage areas
Useful information
Stowage and features
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is
a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
The handling characteristics of a laden
vehicle are dependent on the distribution of
the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
you should observe the following notes when
transporting a load:
RNever
exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight or the gross axle
weight rating of the vehicle (including
occupants). The values are specified on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of
the driver's door.
RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as
possible and as low down in the trunk as
possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
upper edge of the seat backrests.
RAlways place the load against the rear or
front seat backrests. Make sure that the
seat backrests are securely locked into
place.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel
nets to transport loads and luggage.
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
materials appropriate for the weight and
size of the load.
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges
for protection.
Stowage space
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when
braking or abruptly changing directions.
Stowage areas
flung around in these or in similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage compartments,
parcel nets or stowage nets.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.
To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position
2.
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise
to position 1.
X
Eyeglasses compartment
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
Glove box
There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses
in the headliner on the driver's side.
X To open: pull down eyeglasses
compartment : by the handle.
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
X
Stowage compartments in the front
center console
i The glove box can be ventilated
(Y page 142).
All models except AMG vehicles
To open: slide the cover forwards by
handle : in the direction of the arrow until
it engages.
X To close: briefly press the front of
handle :.
X
The glove box can only be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
Z
Stowage and features
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
279
Stowage areas
280
Stowage and features
thrown out of the stowage compartment and
hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
a sudden change in direction.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
secure heavy objects in the trunk.
The maximum permissible load of the
stowage compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).
AMG vehicles
X
Briefly press trim :.
i The stowage tray can be removed.
Stowage compartment under the
armrest
X
To open: pull handle : up and fold
cover ; forwards.
i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the
fire extinguisher is located in the stowage
compartment under the driver's seat.
X
To open: pull handle : up.
The armrest folds out.
Stowage compartments in the rear
center console
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
12 V socket, a USB socket, and an AUX IN
connection or Media Interface are installed
in the stowage compartment. A Media
Interface is a universal interface for mobile
audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3
player (see the separate COMAND
Operating Instructions).
Stowage compartment under the front
seats
G WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the
stowage compartment, the cover may not be
able to restrain the items. Items may be
X
To open: slide covers : and ; in the
direction of the arrow.
i There is a 12 V power socket in the front
stowage compartment.
Stowage areas
! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on the
armrests when they are folded out as you
could damage them.
! Close the cover of the stowage
compartment before folding the rear seat
armrest back into the seat backrest.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 278).
Rear bench seat through-loading
feature
Important safety notes
G WARNING
X
X
To open: fold down seat armrest ;.
Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.
Storage pockets
G WARNING
Storage bags are intended for storing lightweight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
storage bag. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Storage bags cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
backrests can be folded down separately to
increase the trunk capacity.
Folding the seat backrest forward
The stowage pockets are on the back of the
driver's and front-passenger's seats.
Stowage nets
Stowage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell and on the right-hand side
of the trunk.
i Vehicles with memory function: when you
fold one or both parts of the rear seat
Z
Stowage and features
Stowage compartment in the rear seat
armrest
281
Stowage areas
282
backrest forwards, the respective front
seat moves forward slightly, when
necessary, in order to avoid contact.
Vehicles without memory function: if
necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forwards.
X Open the trunk.
X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat
backrest release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is
released.
Stowage and features
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
engages.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the
multifunction display in the instrument
cluster. A warning tone also sounds.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
X
i You should always engage the rear seat
backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent
unauthorized access to the trunk from the
vehicle interior.
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
X
X
Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Folding the seat backrest back
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be
damaged.
General notes
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
RObserve
the loading guidelines
(Y page 278).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
Stowage areas
Trunk
283
Stowage well under the trunk floor
! Unhook the handle before again before
There are six cargo tie down rings : in the
trunk.
Bag hook
G WARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of
luggage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
located in the stowage compartment.
X To open: pull handle : up.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
secure a load.
X
Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
G WARNING
X
Pull bag hook ; down by tab :.
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving
characteristics change. If you exceed the
maximum roof load, the driving
characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a
risk of an accident.
Z
Stowage and features
closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely
to prevent the handle flap from protruding.
Otherwise, you could damage the handle.
Features
284
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
Stowage and features
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such
a way that the vehicle will not sustain
damage even when it is in motion.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the sliding
sunroof fully and open the trunk lid fully
when the roof carrier is installed.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
Cup holder in the front-compartment
center console
! To avoid damaging or scratching the
covers, do not use metallic or hard objects
to open them.
The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof
load may become detached from the vehicle.
You must therefore ensure that you observe
the roof carrier manufacturer's installation
instructions.
All vehicles (except AMG)
: Cup holder
Attaching the roof carrier
AMG vehicles
: Cup holder
Open covers : carefully in the direction of
the arrow.
X Only secure the roof carrier to the
anchorage points under covers :.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
X
; Cover
X
To open: slide cover ; to its foremost
position.
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat
for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm
water only.
AMG vehicles: you can remove the rubber
mat of the cup holder in the direction of the
Features
285
arrow to clean it. Clean with clear, lukewarm
water only.
Fold down the rear seat armrest.
To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
X Press release catch :.
Cup holder ; folds out forwards.
X Swing the rear seat armrest cover back
down, if necessary.
X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.
X
X
To open: slide cover : forwards.
To remove the insert: slide catch ;
inwards in the direction of the arrow.
X Remove cup holder insert = upwards.
X To re-install the insert: place the insert in
the stowage space.
X Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of
the arrow until it engages.
X
X
You can remove the insert and the rubber mat
of the cup holder to clean them. Clean them
with clean, lukewarm water only.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged.
Bottle holder
Observe the "Important safety notes" in the
"Stowage compartments" section
(Y page 278).
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets
or stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the trunk/cargo compartment.
Z
Stowage and features
Cup holder in the rear-compartment
center console
Features
286
! Make sure that any bottles weighing more
Stowage and features
than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the
bottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The
bottle holder could otherwise be damaged.
: Mirror light
; Bracket
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
Press the outer edge of button : and slide
in the direction of the arrow until the bottle
fits into the opening.
X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
X
The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a
capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz.
(1.5 l).
The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;
it merely prevents them from tipping over.
? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
Fold down sun visor :.
Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
X
X
Features
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit
cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,
the stowage space could be damaged.
When extending or retracting, parts of the
body could become trapped within the sweep
of the roller sunblind. There is a risk of injury.
When extending or retracting, make sure that
no one has any parts of the body within the
sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone
becomes trapped, briefly press the button
again. The opening or closing procedure will
be stopped.
Stowage and features
Rear window roller sunblind
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can
move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
or other objects could be damaged.
Extending/retracting the roller
sunblind
287
All vehicles (except AMG)
To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X To remove the insert: grasp insert = by
the notch at the side and lift it up ; and
out.
X To re-install the insert: press insert =
into the holder until it engages.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
The cover moves back.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To extend or retract: briefly press
button :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
X To stop: briefly press button : again.
The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves
back into the out-of-use position.
X
AMG vehicles
Z
Features
288
To open: briefly press the trim on
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X To remove the insert: slide insert ;
forwards in the direction of the arrow.
X Remove insert ;.
X To re-install the insert: place the insert
into the holder and press it in the opposite
direction of the arrow until it engages.
X To close: fold down cover :.
Stowage and features
X
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe
hot cigarette lighter falls
child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Ra
i You can remove the ashtray insert and
use the resulting compartment for
stowage.
Rear-compartment ashtray
All vehicles (except AMG)
To open: slide cover ; forwards.
X To remove the insert: pull insert : up
and out.
X To install the insert: install insert : from
above into the holder and press down into
the holder until it engages.
X
Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions
permit.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is
red-hot.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
The cover moves back.
Features
289
AMG vehicles
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions
permit.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X To open: briefly press the trim on
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is
red-hot.
Open the stowage compartment under the
armrest (Y page 280).
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
X
Socket in the front-compartment center
console
12 V sockets
General notes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).
Accessories include such items as lamps or
chargers for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
All vehicles (except AMG)
To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
The cover moves back.
X
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
the on-board voltage is too low, the power
to the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.
Z
Stowage and features
Socket under the armrest
Features
290
Stowage and features
Socket in the trunk
AMG vehicles
To open: briefly press the trim on
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X To close: fold down cover :.
X
Socket in the rear-compartment center
console
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
mbrace
Important safety notes
! You must have a license agreement to
activate the mbrace service. Make sure
that your system is activated and ready for
use. To register, press the ï MB Info call
button. If any of the steps mentioned are
not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone
hotlines:
RUSA:
X
X
Slide cover ; forwards.
Lift up the cover of socket :.
Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the
service, a user ID and password will be sent
to you by post. USA only: you can use this
password to log onto the mbrace area under
"Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
Rit
has been activated and is operational
corresponding mobile phone network
is available for transmitting data to the
Customer Center
Rthe
Features
service subscription is available
starter battery is sufficiently charged
Rthe
i Determining the location of the vehicle on
a map is only possible if:
RGPS
reception is available.
vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center.
Rthe
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed
as follows:
X
Press the W or X button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Use the volume controller of the audio
system/COMAND.
The system offers various services, e.g:
RAutomatic
and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
USA only: you can find information and a
description of all available features under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if one of the following occurs:
RThe
indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during selfdiagnosis of the system.
RThe
indicator lamp in one or more of the
following buttons continues to light up red
after the system self-diagnosis:
- SOS button
- F Roadside Assistance call button
- ï MB Info call button
Rafter the system self-diagnosis, the
Inoperative or Service Not
Activated message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. In the event of an emergency, help
will have to be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Emergency call
Important safety notes
! You must have a license agreement to
activate the mbrace service. Make sure
that your system is activated and ready for
use. To register, press the ï MB Info call
button. If any of the steps mentioned are
not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone
hotlines:
RUSA:
Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Z
Stowage and features
Ra
291
292
Features
General notes
An emergency call is dialed automatically if
an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
triggered.
i You cannot end an automatically
Stowage and features
triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been
initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
All important information on the emergency
is transmitted, for example:
RCurrent
location of the vehicle (as
determined by the GPS system)
RVehicle identification number
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been
initiated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle
occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center attempts to get more information
on the emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to
the response center, the system was unable
to initiate an emergency call. This can occur
for instance if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available. The indicator lamp
in the SOS button flashes continuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
G WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
emergency if:
Ryou
see smoke inside or outside of the
vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an
accident
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or
similar situations as soon as it is safe to do
so. Move to a safe location along with other
vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
the vehicle in accordance with national
regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
To initiate an emergency call
manually: press cover : briefly to open.
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
flashes until the emergency call is
concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center.
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
X
i If the mobile phone network is
unavailable, mbrace will not be able to
make the emergency call. If you leave the
vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS
button, you will not know whether mbrace
placed the emergency call. In this case,
always summon assistance by other
means.
Roadside Assistance button
Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of
the problem (Y page 297).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified MercedesBenz technician or arranges for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged
for services such as repair work and/or
towing.
Further details are available in your mbrace
manual.
i The system has not been able to initiate
a roadside assistance call, if:
Rthe
X
Press Roadside Assistance button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator
lamp in Roadside Assistance button :
flashes while the call is active. The
multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call message. The audio
output is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
RCurrent
RVehicle
indicator lamp for Roadside
Assistance call button : is flashing
continuously.
Rno voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
This may be because the corresponding
mobile phone network is not available.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding button for ending
a phone call on COMAND.
MB Info call button
location of the vehicle
identification number
i The COMAND display indicates that a call
is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Z
293
Stowage and features
Features
Features
294
Stowage and features
X
Press MB Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator
lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while
the connection is being made. The
Connecting Call message appears in the
multifunction display and COMAND is
muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
RCurrent
RVehicle
location of the vehicle
identification number
i The COMAND display indicates that a call
is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants. You can
obtain information on how to operate your
vehicle's systems, on the location of the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
and on further products and services offered
by Mercedes-Benz USA.
USA only: you can find further information on
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
i The system has not been able to initiate
an MB Info call, if:
Rthe
indicator lamp in MB Info call
button : is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
This may be because the corresponding
mobile phone network is not available.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding button for ending
a phone call on COMAND.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
call can still be initiated. In this case, an
emergency call will take priority and override
all other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended. An emergency
call can only be terminated by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
Rthe
~ button on the multifunction
steering wheel
Ror the corresponding COMAND button for
ending a telephone call
i When a call is initiated, the audio system
is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
connected to COMAND. However, if you
want to use your mobile phone, do so only
when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe
location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinations
Destination Download gives you access to a
data bank with over 15 million Points of
Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
know the destination, the address can be
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
location of Points of Interest (POIs)/
important destinations in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with
up to 20 way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
to the address entered.
Features
The system calculates the route and
subsequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered.
i If you select No, the address can be saved
in the address book.
i The Destination Download function is
available if the corresponding mobile
phone network is available and data
transfer is possible.
i You can only use the Destination
Download function if the vehicle is
equipped with a navigation system.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS
Package and cannot be purchased
separately.
i You can also use the Route Assistance
function if your vehicle is not equipped with
a navigation system.
Within the framework of this service, you
receive a professional and reliable form of
navigation support without having to leave
your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's
current position and the desired destination.
You will then be guided live through the
current route section.
Search & Send
General notes
i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle
must be equipped with mbrace and a
navigation system. You must also have an
mbrace service subscription.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry
service. A destination address which is found
on Google Maps® can be transferred via
mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation
system.
Specifying and sending the destination
address
X Go to the website http://
www.maps.google.com and enter a
destination address into the entry field.
X To send the destination address to the
e-mail address of your mbrace
account: click on the corresponding
button.
i Example:
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
will be sent to your vehicle.
When the "Send" dialog window appears:
In the relevant field, enter the e-mail
address which you specified when
activating your mbrace account.
X Click "Send".
X
i Information on specific commands such
as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found
on the website.
Calling up destination addresses
X Switch on the ignition.
The destination address is loaded into the
vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking
whether navigation should be started.
X Select Yes by sliding XVY and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and confirm
with W.
The system calculates the route and
subsequently starts the route guidance
with the address entered.
i If you select No, the address can be saved
in the address book.
i If you have sent more than one
destination address, each individual
destination must be confirmed separately.
Z
Stowage and features
Select Yes with the = or ; buttons
on the COMAND system.
X Confirm with the 9 button on the
COMAND system.
X
295
296
Features
Stowage and features
i Destination addresses are loaded in the
same order as the order in which they were
sent.
Please note the following if you have
multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with
mbrace and active mbrace accounts:
if multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will
be sent to all the vehicles.
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and
a replacement SmartKey is not available. The
vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote
unlocking may be delayed by 15 to
60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no
longer be opened remotely.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
opened via:
Rthe
Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if
the corresponding mobile phone network
is accessible.
Vehicle remote closing
The remote closing feature can be used when
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you
are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be
locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
locked within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote closing
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed
remotely.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your PIN.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
you switch on the ignition, the Doors
Locked Remotely message appears in the
multifunction display.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
locked via:
Rthe
Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
i The vehicle remote closing feature is
available when the relevant mobile phone
network is available and data connection is
possible.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
X
If your vehicle has been stolen:
X
Notify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center then tries to locate the system. The
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center contacts you and the local law
enforcement agency if the vehicle is
located. However, only the law
enforcement agency is informed of the
location of the vehicle.
X
i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated
for longer than 30 seconds, the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center is
automatically informed.
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
With the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the
Customer Assistance center can provide
improved support for problems with your
vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data
is transferred to the Customer Assistance
center. The customer service representative
can use the received data to decide what kind
of assistance is required. You are then, for
example, guided to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle
is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
center. You will see the Roadside
Assistance Connected message in the
COMAND display. If the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis can be started, the
Request for vehicle diagnosis
received. Start vehicle diagnosis?
message appears in the display.
Confirm the message with Yes.
When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please
Start Ignition message appears, turn
the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 147).
X When the Please follow the
instructions received by phone and
move your vehicle to a safe
position. message appears, follow the
customer service representative's
instructions.
The message in the display disappears.
If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis is canceled
completely.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis
activated. message.
When the diagnosis is completed, the
Transfer vehicle diagnostics data
(Voice connection may be
interrupted during data transfer.)
message appears. The vehicle data can now
be sent to the Customer Assistance center.
X Press OK to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance center is terminated.
You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:
Transferring data... message.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance center.
Depending on what the customer service
representative agreed with you, the voice
connection is re-established after the transfer
is complete. If necessary, you will be
contacted at a later time by another means,
e.g. by e-mail or phone.
Further functions of the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis include, for example:
Rtransfer
of service data to the Customer
Assistance center. If a service is overdue,
the COMAND display shows a message
Z
297
Stowage and features
Features
Features
Stowage and features
298
about various special offers at your
workshop.
Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,
etc. If applicable, you will receive
information on special offers in the e-mail.
USA only: this information can also be
called up under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(Y page 27).
Information on Roadside Assistance
(Y page 23).
Speed alert
Downloading routes
Rthe
Downloading routes allows you to transfer
and save predefined routes in the navigation
system. To do this, an SD memory card must
be inserted into the COMAND system. If no
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
the card into the card slot on the COMAND
system before saving.
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
customer service representative or via the
mbrace portal on the Internet.
Each route can include up to 20 way points.
Once a route has been received by the
navigation system, you will see the <route
name> has been saved to memory card.
Do you want to start route
guidance? message in the COMAND display.
The route is saved to the SD memory card.
X To start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the
display.
i If you select No, the saved route can be
called up later via the navigation menu.
X
Select Start.
Route guidance is started.
i Downloaded and saved data can be called
up again in COMAND.
You can find further information in the
separate COMAND Operating Instructions.
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this
selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a
message will be sent to the Customer
Assistance center. The Customer Assistance
center then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive
this information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
The data which is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center contains the following
information:
location where the speed limit was
exceeded
Rthe time at which the speed limit was
exceeded
Rthe selected speed limit which was
exceeded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
be informed if the vehicle crosses the
boundaries of the selected areas. You can
select the way in which you receive this
information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
The area can be determined as either a circle
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
You can specify up to ten areas
simultaneously. Different settings are
possible for each area.
USA only: these settings can be called up
under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service
representative that you wish to activate geo
fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
text message.
Features
With this function, you can trigger the
vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An
alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic
alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards,
the alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
with the integrated garage door opener,
persons in the range of movement of the
garage door can become trapped or struck by
the garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
The HomeLink® garage door opener
integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you
to operate up to three different door and gate
systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only
on garage doors that:
Rhave
safety stop and reverse features and
current U.S. federal safety standards
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage.
Rmeet
i Certain garage door drives are
incompatible with the integrated garage
door opener. If you have difficulty
programming the integrated garage door
opener, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following
telephone assistance services:
RUSA:
Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515
(free of charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or
compatible products is also available
online at http://www.homelink.com.
i Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 25).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Programming
Programming buttons
Observe the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 299).
Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view
mirror
Garage door remote control A is not part of
the integrated garage door opener.
X The first time before programming, clear
the integrated garage door opener memory
(Y page 301).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Z
Stowage and features
Triggering the vehicle alarm
299
Features
300
Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
the first time. If the selected button has
already been programmed, indicator
lamp : will only light up yellow after ten
seconds have elapsed.
Stowage and features
X
Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X Point garage door remote control A
towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view
mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to
20 cm).
i The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be
necessary. You should test every position
for at least 25 seconds before trying
another position.
X
Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
If indicator lamp : lights up green or
flashes, then programming has been
successful.
X Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
the programming procedure for the
corresponding button on the rear-view
mirror. When doing so, vary the distance
between remote control A and the rearview mirror.
X
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after
successful programming, the garage door
system is using a rolling code. After
programming, you must synchronize the
garage door opener integrated in the rearview mirror with the receiver of the garage
door system.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Observe the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 299).
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objects are present within the sweep of the
door or gate.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press the program button of the door or
gate drive (see the door or gate drive
operating instructions, e.g. under
"programming of additional remote
controls").
i Usually, you now have 30seconds to
initiate the next step.
X
Press previously programmed button ;,
= or ? of the integrated garage door
opener until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then
complete.
Notes on programming the remote
control
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
Therefore, these signals may not last long
enough for the integrated garage door
opener. The signal is not recognized during
programming. Comparable with Canadian
law, some U.S. garage door openers also
feature a "break".
Proceed as follows:
Rif
you live in Canada
you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
you live) when using the programming
steps
Rif
Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
X Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X Press button B of garage door remote
control A for two seconds, then release it
for two seconds.
X Press button B again for two seconds.
X Repeat this sequence on button B of
remote control A until indicator lamp :
lights up green.
If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the
process.
X Continue with the other programming
steps (see above).
X
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems
programming the integrated garage door
opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of
the following instructions:
RCheck
the transmitter frequency of garage
door drive remote control A. This can
usually be found on the back of the remote
control.
The integrated garage door opener is
compatible with devices that have units
which operate in the frequency range of
280to 433MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door
remote control A. This increases the
likelihood that garage door remote control
A will transmit a strong and precise signal
to the integrated garage door opener in the
rear-view mirror.
RWhen programming, hold remote control
A at varying distances and angles from the
button that you are programming. Try
various angles at a distance between 2and
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances.
RIf another remote control for the same
garage door drive is available, repeat the
same programming steps with this remote
control. Before performing these steps,
make sure that new batteries have been
installed in garage door drive remote
control A.
RNote that some remote controls only
transmit for a limited amount of time (the
indicator lamp on the remote control goes
out). Press button B on remote control
A again before transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal
reception/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control.
Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door system.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code:
indicator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code:
indicator lamp : flashes green.
i The transmitter will transmit a signal as
long as the button is pressed. The
transmission is halted after a maximum of
ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights
up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again
if necessary.
Clearing the memory
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the
indicator lamp turns green.
X
Z
301
Stowage and features
Features
302
Features
i Make sure that you clear the memory of
the integrated garage door opener before
selling the vehicle.
Setting the compass
Compass
Stowage and features
Calling up the compass
North America zone map
To receive a correct display in rear-view
mirror :, the compass must be calibrated
and the magnetic field zone set.
X Briefly press button =.
Compass ; displays in which compass
direction the vehicle is currently traveling:
N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.
South America zone map
X
Set your location using the zone maps.
Press and hold button =(Y page 302) for
approximately three seconds.
The zone currently selected appears in
compass display ;(Y page 302).
X To select the zone: press
button =(Y page 302) repeatedly until the
desired zone is selected.
The zone has been selected when compass
display ;(Y page 302) shows the heading.
This takes a few seconds.
X
Features
303
Calibrating the compass
Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
do the following:
X
the compass in the open and not
in the vicinity of steel structures or highvoltage transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear
window defroster.
Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Press and hold button =(Y page 302) for
approximately six seconds until the
C symbol appears in compass display ;
(Y page 302).
X Drive in a full circle at approximately
3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
completed, the current direction is shown
in compass display ;(Y page 302).
Stowage and features
Rcalibrate
Slide the seat backwards.
To install: place the floormat in the
footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off
retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
X
X
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats.
Z
304
305
306
306
309
311
Maintenance and care
Useful information ............................
Engine compartment ........................
Maintenance ......................................
Care ....................................................
306
Engine compartment
Useful information
Maintenance and care
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement.
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is
overheated or when there is a fire in the
engine compartment could expose you to hot
gases or other service products. There is a
risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment,
Rswitch
off the ignition
reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Rkeep clothing away from moving parts
Rnever
G WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection
system work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
injury.
Never touch components of the ignition
system or fuel injection system when the
ignition is switched on.
Opening the hood
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
Engine compartment
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield
wipers or the hood.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil
over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The
oil consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
X
the vehicle on a level surface.
engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Rthe
Checking the oil level using the oil
dipstick
X
Reach into the gap, pull hood catch
handle ; up and lift the hood.
If you lift the hood by approximately
15 inches (40 cm), the hood is opened and
held open automatically by the gas-filled
strut.
Closing the hood
Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 inches (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.
X
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark
= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
engine oil.
X
Z
Maintenance and care
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
307
308
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil
G WARNING
Maintenance and care
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down
and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the
components before starting the engine.
H Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful
to the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that
have been approved for vehicles with a
service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following:
Rusing
engine oils and oil filters that have
not been specifically approved for the
service system
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
the interval for replacement specified by
the service system has been exceeded
Rusing engine oil additives.
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
excess engine oil siphoned off.
Example: engine oil cap
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)
of engine oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
X Check the oil level again with the oil
dipstick (Y page 307).
X
Further information on engine oil
(Y page 375).
Additional service products
Checking coolant level
G WARNING
The engine cooling system is pressurized,
particularly when the engine is warm. When
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Maintenance
309
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system/headlamp cleaning
system
G WARNING
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 377).
Maintenance and care
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the
vehicle is on a level surface and the engine
has cooled down.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 147).
X Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
X Turn the SmartKey to position
0 (Y page 147) in the ignition lock.
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise to allow excess pressure to
escape.
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
= in the filler neck when cold, there is
enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel
filler neck when warm, there is enough
coolant in expansion tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
X
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X Add the premixed washer fluid.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
X
The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
windshield washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system.
If the washer fluid level drops below the
recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message
appears in the multifunction display
prompting you to refill the washer fluid
(Y page 262).
Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 378).
Maintenance
ASSYST PLUS
Service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Z
Maintenance
310
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Maintenance and care
does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 307).
Displaying service messages
Switch on the ignition.
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by
pressing the a button.
The service due date appears in the
multifunction display.
X
X
The multifunction display shows a service
message for several seconds, e.g.:
Information about Service
RService
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display has been inadvertently reset, this
setting can be corrected at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may
otherwise lead to increased wear and
damage to the major assemblies or the
vehicle.
A in .. Days
A Due
RService A Exceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with
a number or another letter, shows the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for
a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not take into account any periods of
time during which the battery is
disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service
schedule:
RService
X
Note down the service due date displayed
in the multifunction display before
disconnecting the battery.
or
X
After reconnecting the battery, subtract
the battery disconnection periods from the
service date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
X
Press the a or % button on the
steering wheel.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
after the service work has been carried out.
You can also obtain further information on
maintenance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions
or increased load on the vehicle,
maintenance work must be carried out more
frequently, for example:
Rregular
city driving with frequent
intermediate stops
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long
periods
Care
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
H Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible
manner.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents
recommended and approved by MercedesBenz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Automatic car wash
G WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
of the following:
Rwhen
Rdry,
Rin
rough or hard cloths
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rsolvents
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
The vehicle can then be parked.
towing the vehicle
the car wash
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
! Make sure that:
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
ventilation/heating is switched off
(the OFF button has been pressed).
Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
0.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
Rthe
! In car washes with a towing mechanism,
make sure that the automatic transmission
is in transmission position N, otherwise the
vehicle could be damaged.
RVehicles with a SmartKey:
Z
Maintenance and care
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
arduous operating conditions, the tires must
be checked more often. Further information
can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
311
Maintenance and care
312
Care
Do not remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock. Do not open the driver's
door or front-passenger door when the
engine is switched off. Otherwise, the
automatic transmission selects park
position P automatically and locks the
wheels. You can prevent this by shifting
the automatic transmission to N
beforehand.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position P
automatically and locks the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in position N:
X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
ignition is switched off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/
Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windshield and the wiper
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
wiping noises caused by residue on the
windshield.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in all
countries concerned.
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X Use a soft sponge to clean.
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
X Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
soon as possible.
Power washers
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced
immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about
the correct distance is available from the
equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around
when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
Rtires
Rdoor
gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
components
Relectrical
Care
Rconnectors
Rlights
Rseals
Rtrim
Rventilation
slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
Cleaning the paintwork
! Do not affix:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rmagnetic
plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by
inadequate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified
specialist workshop.
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
off the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products
recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. This is the case approximately every
three to five months, depending on the
climate conditions and the care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by MercedesBenz should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot.
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
shine.
! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
RVigorous
rubbing with unsuitable
materials.
RFrequent use of car washes.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or
polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
wax. These products are only suitable for
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
with matte finish leads to considerable
surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
Always have paintwork repairs performed
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish.
i The vehicle should preferably be washed
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
and plenty of water.
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of recommended and
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Z
Maintenance and care
Rbattery
313
Care
314
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
Maintenance and care
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
The vehicle can then be parked.
Cleaning the windows
Cleaning wiper blades
G WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
G WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing
solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Do not touch the insides of the windows
with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
and pollen may under certain
circumstances prevent water from draining
away. This can lead to corrosion damage
and damage to electronic components.
X
Clean the inside and outside of the
windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
product that is recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
X
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the plastic light lenses.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
315
Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
Maintenance and care
X
Care
Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a
distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment
manufacturer.
X
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents such as sanitary
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Interior care
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the
following:
Ralcohol-based
thinner or gasoline
cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household
cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to
irreparable damage to the display.
Rabrasive
Z
Care
316
Before cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a
commercially available microfiber cloth
and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry
microfiber cloth.
X
Cleaning Night View Assist Plus
! Never clean the camera lens. When
Maintenance and care
cleaning the field of vision of the driving
systems, make sure that you do not spray
glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the
camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified
specialist workshop.
Cleaning the plastic trim
G WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag
deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic
surfaces:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rscented
oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
X
X
Fold down the camera cover by recess :.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X
X
Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in
front of camera ;.
Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been
recommended and approved by MercedesBenz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim
elements
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,
polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk
of damaging the surface.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
Care
Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
X
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean
genuine leather, artificial leather or
Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can
damage the cover.
i Note that regular care is essential to
ensure that the appearance and comfort of
the covers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
RDifferences in the texture
RSigns of stretching and marking
RSlight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
! To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
RClean
genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the
covers down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a
qualified specialist workshop.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing
1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
cloth moistened with a solution
containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish
washing liquid). Rub carefully and always
wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving
visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
afterwards. Cleaning results depend on
the type of dirt and how long it has been
there.
RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event
of an accident. This poses an increased risk
of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
Z
Maintenance and care
mostly made of anodized aluminum and
can lose their shine if chrome polish is
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
when cleaning the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
are chrome-plated or not, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
317
Care
318
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
X
Use clean, lukewarm water and soap
solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile
cleaning agents recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Maintenance and care
X
319
320
320
321
322
326
328
331
Breakdown assistance
Useful information ............................
Where will I find...? ...........................
Flat tire ..............................................
Battery (vehicle) ................................
Jump-starting ....................................
Towing and tow-starting ..................
Fuses ..................................................
Where will I find...?
320
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
Breakdown assistance
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
: Vehicle tool kit tray
; Stowage well
Where will I find...?
= "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
First-aid kit
X
X
Open the trunk lid.
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 283).
The vehicle tool kit contains:
RFolding
RFuse
wheel chock
allocation chart
RJack
RAlignment
bolt
pair of gloves
RLug wrench
RTowing eye
ROne
Open the trunk lid.
Slide the stowage net down.
X Open the stowage compartment.
X Release tensioning strap :.
X Remove first-aid kit ;.
X
X
Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel
(AMG vehicles)
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid
kit at least once a year. Replace the
contents if necessary, and replace missing
items.
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the
stowage well under the trunk floor.
: Towing eye
; One pair of gloves
= Jack
? Folding wheel chock
Flat tire
A Alignment bolt
B Sheet for faulty wheel
C Tire inflation compressor
D Lug wrench
E Fuse allocation chart
X
X
Open the trunk lid.
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 283).
Flat tire
321
All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
Make sure that they are not endangered as
they do so.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
area while a wheel is being changed.
Anyone who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
traffic conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
X
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended
tires (tires with run-flat
properties) (Y page 321)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
Ran emergency spare wheel(Y page 367)
Information on changing/mounting a wheel
(Y page 357).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 167).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
"normal" level is selected (Y page 189).
X Switch off the engine.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 147).
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. The affected
tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the loadbearing capacity and the speed index
(Y page 351).
MOExtended tires may only be used in
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure
monitor.
If the pressure loss warning message
appears in the multifunction display:
RObserve
the instructions in the display
messages (Y page 258).
RCheck the tire for damage.
RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
The maximum driving distance is
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the
vehicle is partially laden and approximately
18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully
laden.
Breakdown assistance
Preparing the vehicle
322
Battery (vehicle)
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving
distance possible depends upon:
RSpeed
RRoad
condition
temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving
conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
through a moderate style of driving.
The maximum permissible distance which
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
the moment the tire pressure loss warning
appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Breakdown assistance
ROutside
i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you use only tires:
Rof
the size specified for the vehicle and
Rmarked "MOExtended"
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be
replaced with a MOExtended tire, a
standard tire may be used as a temporary
measure. Make sure that you use the
proper size and type (summer or winter
tire).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when
cornering, accelerating quickly and when
braking. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
Ryou
hear banging noises.
Rthe vehicle starts to shake.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
RESP®
is intervening constantly.
are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
Rthere
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are
required when working on the battery, e.g.
removal and installing. You should therefore
have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting
system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
restricted. You could lose control of the
vehicle, for example:
Rbraking
Rin
the event of abrupt steering maneuver
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar
incident, contact a qualified specialist
workshop immediately. Do not drive any
further. You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly
explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Battery (vehicle)
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jumpstarting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged. A buildup of electrostatic charge can be caused, for
example:
Rby
wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
Rif you push or pull the battery across the
carpet or other synthetic materials
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery
produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit
occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen
gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
RIt is important that you observe the
described order of the battery terminals
when connecting and disconnecting a
battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and
disconnecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
water and seek medical attention.
H Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or a
special collection point for
used batteries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified
specialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESSGO, ensure that the ignition is switched
off. Check that all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
electronic components, such as the
alternator, may be damaged.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
clamp and then the positive terminal
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
Rthe transmission is locked in position P
after disconnecting the battery. The
vehicle is secured against rolling away.
You can then no longer move the vehicle.
Z
Breakdown assistance
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
323
324
Battery (vehicle)
The battery and the cover of the positive
terminal clamp must be installed securely
during operation.
Comply with safety precautions and take
protective measures when handling
batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Breakdown assistance
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the
battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and
faceguard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
disconnected at a qualified specialist
workshop. You can also charge the battery
with a charger recommended by MercedesBenz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
for further information.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop if you wish to leave your
vehicle parked for a long period of time.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
vehicle and do not require any electrical
consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
power.
i If the power supply has been interrupted,
e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
have to:
Rset
the clock. Information on setting the
clock can be found in the separate
operating instructions.
On vehicles with COMAND and a
navigation system, the clock is set
automatically.
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically, by folding
the mirrors out once (Y page 110).
Charging the battery
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use batteries
which have been tested and approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These
batteries provide increased impact
protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
suffering acid burns should the battery be
damaged in the event of an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the
maximum possible service life, it must always
be sufficiently charged.
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can
discharge over time if you do not use the
vehicle. In this case, have the battery
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
Battery (vehicle)
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
water and seek medical attention.
325
information and availability. Read the battery
charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at
temperatures below freezing point. When
jump-starting the vehicle or charging the
battery, gases can escape from the battery.
There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
Breakdown assistance
! Only use battery chargers with a
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 326).
X Open the hood (Y page 306).
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor
battery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 326).
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case,
you may neither charge the battery nor jumpstart the vehicle. The service life of a thawedout battery may be shorter. The starting
characteristics may be impaired, especially at
low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Never charge a battery still installed in the
vehicle unless a battery charger unit
approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. A
battery charger unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an
accessory. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
Z
326
Jump-starting
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and
seek medical attention.
Breakdown assistance
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe
battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
Jump-starting
ROnly
327
jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
RMake
Rthe
jumper cables are not damaged.
the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine
is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device.
Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X
X
Z
Breakdown assistance
Rwhen
Towing and tow-starting
328
First, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
qualified specialist workshop.
Breakdown assistance
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
Rthe
engine is not running.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning.
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely.
G WARNING
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or towstarted is greater than the permissible gross
weight of your vehicle:
Rthe
towing eye could detach itself
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could
rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the
permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 372).
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen
Rin
towing the vehicle
the car wash
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
use the key instead of the Start/Stop
button. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may shift to position P when
the driver's or front-passenger door are
opened, which could lead to damage to the
transmission.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
Towing and tow-starting
329
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission
damage, have it transported on a transporter
or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in
position N when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
position N
Breakdown assistance
Rcannot
i Deactivate the automatic locking feature
(Y page 83). You could otherwise be locked
out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
Example: towing eye covers
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There
is a risk of burns when removing the rear
cover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular
care when removing the rear cover.
Towing eye covers (AMG vehicles)
The mountings for the removable towing eyes
are located in the bumpers. They are at the
front and at the rear, behind the covers.
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 320).
X Pull cover : out of the bumper in the
direction of the arrow by inserting your
fingers into the recess.
X Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
Z
Towing and tow-starting
330
Take cover ; off the opening.
X Screw in and tighten the towing eye
clockwise to the stop.
X
Removing the towing eye
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
Position the top of cover : in the bumper
and press it in at the bottom until it
engages.
X Attach cover ; to the bumper and press
until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
X
Breakdown assistance
X
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
! The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP® could
otherwise damage the brake system.
Only possible for vehicles without
4MATIC.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 120).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey
from the ignition lock.
X When leaving the vehicle, take the
SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 328).
The automatic transmission automatically
shifts to position P when you open the driver's
or front-passenger door or when you remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order
to ensure that the automatic transmission
stays in position N when towing the vehicle,
you must observe the following points:
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in
position 0.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 147).
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 120).
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
i When towing with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual to signal a change of
direction. In this case, only the indicator
lamps for the direction of travel flash. After
resetting the combination switch, the
hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.
X
Transporting the vehicle
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 328).
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle
such as axle or steering components.
Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
Fuses
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position N.
Fuses
As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric cables could be
overloaded. This could result in a fire. There
is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the parking brake.
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position P.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey
from the ignition lock.
X Secure the vehicle.
X
Important safety notes
G WARNING
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Otherwise, components or
systems could be damaged.
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or
damage to the front or rear axle, have it
transported on a transporter or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical
system
If the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To
shift the automatic transmission to position
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when
jump-starting (Y page 326).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be started by tow-starting. This
could otherwise damage the transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting"
at (Y page 326).
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
components on the circuit and their functions
stop operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Before changing a fuse
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 167).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove it (Y page 147).
or
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure
the ignition is switched off (Y page 147).
X
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
Z
Breakdown assistance
X
331
Fuses
332
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
Rfuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side,
when viewed in the direction of travel
the fuse allocation chart is located in the
vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment
under the trunk floor (Y page 320).
Breakdown assistance
Fuse box in the engine compartment
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
Open clamp :.
X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
lying correctly in the cover.
X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
X Fold down cover and close clamps :.
X Secure lines ; in the guides.
X Close the hood.
X
Fuse box in the trunk
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
X
Open the trunk lid.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X Open the hood.
X
To open: release cover : at the top right
and left-hand sides with a flat object.
X Open cover : downwards in the direction
of the arrow.
X
Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X To open: remove lines ; from the guides.
X Move lines ; aside. Route the lines behind
connection = to do this.
X
333
334
334
334
336
338
345
349
357
362
367
Wheels and tires
Useful information ............................
Important safety notes ....................
Operation ...........................................
Winter operation ...............................
Check .................................................
Loading the vehicle ..........................
All about wheels and tires ...............
Changing a wheel .............................
Wheel and tire combinations ...........
Emergency spare wheel ...................
334
Operation
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
Rpay
attention to the information and
warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not
being used correctly can impair the operating
safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist
workshop and inquire about:
Rsuitability
Rlegal
Important safety notes
Wheels and tires
G WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
stipulations
recommendations
Information on the dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section
(Y page 362).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
Rfactory
Ron
the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar
(Y page 345)
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap (Y page 165)
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 338)
Rmodel
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer
Rmodel
G WARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving,
steering and braking characteristics of the
vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
Rdo
not drive with a flat tire.
replace the flat tire with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rimmediately
Operation
Information on driving
If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire
pressures and correct them if necessary.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you
suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
as possible to check the wheels and tires for
damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
causing the unusual handling characteristics.
If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
Operation
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of
accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as
well as after driving off-road or on rough
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to
damage such as:
Rcuts
in the tires
Rpunctures
Rtears
in the tires
on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 335). If necessary, turn
the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect
the inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Rbulges
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
pressure as necessary (Y page 338).
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 367).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
RDriving
style
pressure
RDistance covered
RTire
Important safety notes on the tire
tread
G WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving
conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at
different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
RSummer
RM+S
tires: â in (3 mm)
tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Z
Wheels and tires
and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle.
Otherwise, the tires, particularly the
sidewalls, may be damaged.
335
336
Winter operation
Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated
into the tire tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once the tread depth
is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the
case, the tire is so worn that it must be
replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
Wheels and tires
ROnly
mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install a
different type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 321).
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels.
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach
their full performance after this distance.
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
RReplace the tires after six years at the
latest, regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 367).
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by
Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
a flat tire (Y page 321).
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
factory. It is therefore recommended that
you additionally equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
qualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 357).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity significantly, and
therefore traction and braking power as well.
Change the tires on your vehicle to
M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
for this type of damage.
M+S tires
G WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There
is a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use
winter tires or all-weather tires. Both types of
tire are identified by the M+S marking.
Winter operation
Check the tire pressures (Y page 341).
Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire
pressure loss warning system
(Y page 342).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor
(Y page 342).
X
X
For more information on driving with the
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 367).
Snow chains
G WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
tire combinations" section under "Tires and
wheels".
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use snow chains
that have been specially approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a
corresponding standard of quality.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
bear the following points in mind:
RSnow
chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
wheel-tire combinations (Y page 362).
ROnly use snow chains when driving on
roads completely covered by snow.
Remove the snow chains as soon as
possible when you come to a road that is
not snow-covered.
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate
regulations if you wish to mount snow
chains.
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
pulling away with snow chains installed
(Y page 69). This way you can allow the
wheels to spin in a controlled manner,
achieving an increased driving force
(cutting action).
For more information on driving with the
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 367).
Rnever
install snow chains to the front
wheels
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
! On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must
drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains
have been mounted. The vehicle may
otherwise be damaged.
! On some tire sizes there is not enough
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
Z
Wheels and tires
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking
provide the best possible grip in wintry road
conditions.
Only these tires will allow driving safety
systems such as ABS and ESP® to function
optimally in winter. These tires have been
developed specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling
characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
Once the winter tires are mounted:
337
338
Check
Check
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire and Loading Information placard
G WARNING
Tires with tire pressures that are too low or
too high are associated with the following
hazards:
Wheels and tires
Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
heavily laden or when driven at high
speeds.
Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which can severely impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving, steering and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired.
There is a risk of accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires
including the spare wheel:
Rmonthly,
at least
the load changes
Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Rif
i The specifications on the sample Tire and
: Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 345).
The Tire and Loading Information placard
contains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
are valid for the maximum permissible load
and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Loading Information placard and tire
pressure tables are examples. Tire
pressure specifications are vehicle-specific
and may deviate from the data shown here.
The tire pressure specifications that are
valid for your vehicle can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 367).
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended pressures for cold tires for
various operating conditions, i.e. differing
load and speed conditions.
Check
339
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
pressure information following is only valid
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
table for different numbers of occupants and
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
seats may differ.
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size
and can be found on the tire sidewall
(Y page 351).
If the tire pressures have been set to the
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower
road speeds, the pressures should be reset
to the higher values:
Rif
you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds.
i The tire pressures for increased loads
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss. There
is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about
the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
the electronic tire pressure monitoring
system, the tire pressure can be checked
using the on-board computer.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is
dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire
pressures when the tires are cold.
Z
Wheels and tires
G WARNING
Wheels and tires
340
Check
The tires are cold:
Underinflated tires may:
Rif
Roverheat,
the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
1.5 psi). Take this into account when
checking the pressure of warm tires. Only
correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the
current operating conditions. If you check the
tire pressure when the tires are warm, the
resulting value will be higher than if the tires
were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the
tire pressure to the value specified for cold
tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be
too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
the tire pressure table on the inside of
the fuel filler flap
Ron the yellow label on the emergency spare
wheel (depending on the vehicle
equipment)
Rin
leading to tire defects
an adverse effect on handling
characteristics
Rwear quickly and unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Rhave
Overinflation
G WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
Rincrease
the braking distance
an adverse effect on handling
characteristics
Rwear quickly and unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rbe more susceptible to damage
Rhave
Maximum tire pressures
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflation
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can
overheat and burst as a consequence. In
addition, they also suffer from excessive and/
or irregular wear, which can severely impair
the braking properties and the driving
characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
: Example: maximum permissible tire
pressure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the
recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
Check
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 338).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
Ron
the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar
(Y page 345)
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap (Y page 165)
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 338)
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire
pressure, proceed as follows:
Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
the recommended value on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 338).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to
the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve.
Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,
check the tire pressure again using the tire
pressure gauge.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
X
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire pressure using the rotational speed of
the wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
message will appear in the multifunction
display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss
warning by the Run Flat Indicator
Active Press 'OK' to Restart message
which appears in the Serv. menu of the
multifunction display. Further information on
the message display can be found under
"Restarting the tire pressure loss warning
system" section (Y page 342).
Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not
warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 338).
The tire pressure loss warning does not
replace the need to regularly check the tire
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
tires at the same time cannot be detected by
the tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering maneuvers.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
Rroad
Ryou
conditions are wintry.
are driving on sand or gravel.
Z
Wheels and tires
when adjusting the tire pressure
(Y page 338).
341
342
Check
Ryou
adopt a very sporty driving style
(cornering at high speeds or driving with
high rates of acceleration).
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof).
Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
if you have:
Rchanged
the tire pressure
the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires
for the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressures can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler
flap. The tire pressure loss warning system
can only give reliable warnings if you have
set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect
tire pressure is set, these incorrect values
will be monitored.
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 338).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147).
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Tire
Pressure menu.
X Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active
Press 'OK' to Restart message
appears in the multifunction display.
Wheels and tires
Rchanged
If you wish to confirm the restart:
Press the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Yes.
X Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
message appears in the multifunction
display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
loss warning system will monitor the set
tire pressures of all four tires.
X
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
or
When the Tire Pressure Now OK?
message appears, press the 9
or : button to select Cancel.
X Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
X
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the
vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor
the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire
pressure monitor warns you if the pressure
drops in one or more of the tires. The tire
pressure monitor only functions if the correct
sensors are installed on all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
of driving, the current tire pressure of each
tire is shown in the Service menu of the
multifunction display. For further information
on displaying this message, refer to the
"Checking the tire pressure electronically"
section (Y page 344).
Example: current tire pressure display
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once every two
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire
pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler
flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale lights up, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the warning
lamp will flash for approximately a minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the
vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(Y page 338). Note that the correct tire
pressure for the current operating situation
must first be taught-in to the tire pressure
monitor. If there is a substantial loss of
pressure, the warning threshold for the
warning message is aligned to the reference
values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure
monitor after adjusting the pressure of the
cold tires (Y page 345). The current
pressures are saved as new reference values.
As a result, a warning message will appear if
the tire pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 338).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
sudden steering movements
Z
343
Wheels and tires
Check
Check
344
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for
indicating a pressure loss or malfunction.
Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up
indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or
the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
Wheels and tires
Rif
the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tire pressure on one or more tires is
significantly too low. The tire pressure
monitor is not malfunctioning.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,
it may take more than ten minutes for the tire
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
malfunction by flashing for approximately one
minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire
pressure warning lamp goes out after a few
minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those
measured at a gas station with a pressure
gauge. The tire pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at
sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure
values indicated by a pressure gauge are
higher than those shown by the on-board
computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire
pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio
transmitting equipment (e.g. radio
headphones, two-way radios) that may be
being operated in or near the vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure
electronically
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2(Y page 147) in the ignition lock .
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
X Press the a button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the multifunction display.
X
If the vehicle was parked for longer than
20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be
displayed after driving a few
minutes message is shown.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
the tire pressure value to the individual
wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
Monitor Active display message is shown
instead of the tire pressure display. The tire
pressures are already being monitored.
i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,
the system may continue to show the tire
pressure of the wheel that has been
removed for a few minutes. If this occurs,
note that the value displayed for the
position where the spare wheel is mounted
is not the same as the current tire pressure
of the emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure monitor warning
messages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires, a warning message
is shown in the multifunction display and the
yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
comes on.
RIf
the Correct Tire Pressure message
appears in the multifunction display, the
tire pressure in at least one tire is too low
and must be corrected at the next
opportunity.
RIf the Check Tire Pressure message
appears in the multifunction display, the
tire pressure in one or more tires has
dropped significantly and the tires must be
checked.
RIf the Tire Malfunction appears in the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in
Loading the vehicle
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are
rotated, the tire pressures may be
displayed for the wrong positions for a
short time. This is rectified after a few
minutes of driving, and the tire pressures
are displayed for the correct positions.
Tire pressures will be displayed
after driving a few minutes
message.
X Press the : button.
The multifunction display shows the Use
Current Pressures as New Reference
Values message.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor,
all existing warning messages are deleted and
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
the currently set tire pressures as the
reference values for monitoring. In most
cases, the tire pressure monitor will
automatically detect the new reference
values after you have changed the tire
pressure. However, you can also define
reference values manually as described here.
The tire pressure monitor then monitors the
new tire pressure values.
X Set the tire pressure to the value
recommended for the corresponding
driving situation on the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar on the
driver's side (Y page 338).
Additional tire pressure values for different
loads can also be found on the tire pressure
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(Y page 338).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
on all four wheels.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
X Press the a button.
The multifunction display shows the
current tire pressure for each tire or the
Press the a button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
message appears in the multifunction
display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures
are within the specified range. The new tire
pressures are then accepted as reference
values and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum
permissible vehicle load. It also contains
Z
Wheels and tires
one or more tires has dropped suddenly
and the tires must be checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the display messages in the "Tires" section
(Y page 258).
345
346
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
details of the tire sizes and
corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You
can also find information about the
maximum gross axle weight rating on the
front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
exceed the maximum load or the
maximum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
X
Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
load and luggage must not exceed the
specified value.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The maximum
permissible gross vehicle weight rating is
vehicle-specific and may differ from that in
the illustration. You can find the valid
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
rating for your vehicle on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Number of seats
: B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The number of
seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from
the details shown. The number of seats in
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Loading the vehicle
347
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
Wheels and tires
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
Z
348
Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you
are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (Y page 345).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
1500 lbs (680 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg)
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Number of people in
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
5
3
1
Distribution of the
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the
occupants
Occupant 1:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1:
200 lbs (91 kg)
Occupant 2:
190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 1:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg)
540 lbs (245 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Wheels and tires
Step 2
All about wheels and tires
349
Step 3
Example 2
Example 3
1500 lbs (680 kg)
Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =
750 lbs (340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg)
Ò540 lbs (245 kg)
=960 lbs (435 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg)
Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs (612 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 345).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a
suitable vehicle weighbridge.
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Wheels and tires
Permissible load
(maximum gross
vehicle weight rating
from the Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)
Example 1
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
U.S. government specifications. Their
purpose is to provide drivers with uniform
reliable information on tire performance data.
Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using
three performance factors: : tread wear
grade, ; traction grade and = temperature
grade. These regulations do not apply to
Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North
America are provided with the corresponding
quality grading markings on the sidewall of
the tire.
Where applicable, the tire grading
information can be found on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and maximum
tire width.
Z
350
All about wheels and tires
Example:
RTreadwear
grade: 200
grade: AA
RTemperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the
statutory safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
RTraction
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Wheels and tires
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm, due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate conditions.
Traction
G WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road
surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
tires. Observe the legally required minimum
tire tread depth (Y page 335). Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S
tires) (Y page 336).
Temperature
G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C. These represent the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
All about wheels and tires
Tire labeling
Overview
351
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
: Tire width
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
;
=
?
A
B
C
D
E
(Y page 355)
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 354)
Maximum tire load (Y page 353)
Maximum tire pressure (Y page 340)
Manufacturer
Tire material (Y page 354)
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed index (Y page 351)
Load index (Y page 353)
Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire
in addition to the tire name (sales
designation) and the manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing
capacity and the approved maximum speed
could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.
There is a risk of accident.
= Tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load bearing index
B Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
may not contain any letters or may contain
one letter that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size
description (as shown above): these are
passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
between the tire height and tire width and is
shown in percent. The aspect ratio is
Z
Wheels and tires
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
Wheels and tires
352
All about wheels and tires
calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire
height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter
of the rim flange. The rim diameter is
specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A
is a numerical code that specifies the
maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum
permissible load can be found on the
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 345).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can
bear. For further information on the maximum
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see
(Y page 353).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 353).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and
adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Index
Speed rating
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)
over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
over 149 mph (240 km/h)
ROptionally,
tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"
in the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
The service specification is made up of
load-bearing index A and speed rating
B.
RIf the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service
specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
order to find out the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this
example, "97 Y" is the service specification.
The letter "Y" represents the speed rating.
The maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with
maximum speeds of over 186 mph
(300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the
service specification must be given in
parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
All about wheels and tires
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
Q M+S1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
353
Load index
the driving characteristics of winter tires.
In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill
the requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC)
regarding the tire traction on snow. They
have been especially developed for driving
on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding the following speeds:
Rall
vehicles (except AMG vehicles):
130 mph (210 km/h)
RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)
RAMG vehicles with Performance Package:
186 mph (300 km/h)
R
The speed rating of tires mounted at the
factory may be higher than the maximum
speed that the electronic speed limiter
permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 362).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
1
In addition to the load bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters
that identify speed index B on the sidewall
of the tire (Y page 351).
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard
load (SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that
depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at a certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load : is the maximum
permissible weight for which the tire is
approved.
Or M+Si for winter tires.
Z
Wheels and tires
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
354
All about wheels and tires
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum
permissible load can be found on the
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 345).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of every tire produced.
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
by the manufacturer as a code to describe
specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
2008.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Wheels and tires
Tire characteristics
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or
retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and
other safety-relevant matters. It makes it
possible for the purchaser to easily identify
the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type
code ? and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code:
manufacturer identification code ; provides
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (Y page 334).
This information describes the type of tire
cord and the number of layers in
sidewall : and under tire tread ;.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure.
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar.
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the United States Department of
Transportation.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire
identification. It specifies the speed range for
which the tire is approved.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the
vehicle is designed multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lb).
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants,
luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not
exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR
as specified on the vehicle identification plate
on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressure
The recommended tire pressure applies to
the tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard
contains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended pressures for cold tires for
various operating conditions, i.e. differing
load and speed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
This is the combined weight of all standard
and optional equipment available for the
vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually
installed on the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories,
occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
weight rating is specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
Rthe
curb weight of the vehicle
weight of the accessories
Rthe load limit
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Rthe
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa
corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire
pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall
of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing
capacity more precisely.
Z
355
Wheels and tires
All about wheels and tires
356
All about wheels and tires
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the airconditioning system and optional equipment
if these are installed in the vehicle, but does
not include passengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum
permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for
which a tire is approved.
Wheels and tires
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an
outward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
be corrected when the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
Rif
the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
coming loose from the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
These optional extras, such as highperformance brakes, level control, a roof rack
or a high-performance battery, are not
included in the curb weight and the weight of
the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used
by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are
distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the
number of seats in the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
You can find information on what to do in the
event of a flat tire in the "Breakdown
assistance" section (Y page 321).
Information on driving with MOExtended tires
in the event of a flat tire can be found under
"MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
characteristics" (Y page 321).
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in
the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare
wheel is mounted as described under
"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 358).
Rotating the wheels
G WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of
accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are
located in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used
near the valve. This could damage the
electronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 358).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
can rotate the wheels according to the
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
available, the tires should then be replaced
every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wear requires
this. Do not change the direction of wheel
rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is interchanged. Check the tire pressure and,
if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or the tire pressure monitor.
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
maintained.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Cleaning the wheels
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
Z
357
Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Changing a wheel
358
to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced
immediately.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
"normal" level is selected (Y page 189).
X Switch off the engine.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 147).
X If included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle (Y page 320).
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
Wheels and tires
X
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 320).
The folding wheel chock is an additional
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away, for example when changing a
wheel.
X Fold both plates upwards :.
X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
Securing the vehicle on level ground
X
On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
Changing a wheel
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
jack must be positioned vertically, directly
under the jacking point of the vehicle.
! The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
The following must be observed when raising
the vehicle:
Rto
raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used
incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the
vehicle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
X
Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.
Z
Wheels and tires
Rbefore
X
raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never
disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
Rnever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.
Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
359
Changing a wheel
360
Removing a wheel
! AMG vehicles: during removal and
repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim
can strike the ceramic-brake disc and
damage it. Therefore, take precautions and
get a second person to assist you.
Alternatively, you can use a second
alignment bolt.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
Wheels and tires
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
X
Position jack = at jacking point ;.
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt
completely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.
X
Mounting a new wheel
Example
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn crank ? until the tire is raised a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
X
G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
Changing a wheel
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 357).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety
reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
! AMG vehicle with ceramic brake
discs: during removal and repositioning of
the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the
ceramic-brake disc and damage it.
Therefore, take precautions and have a
second person assist you. Alternatively,
you can use a second alignment bolt.
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight.
X Vehicles with a collapsible spare
wheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel
(Y page 368).
Only then lower the vehicle.
X
Lowering the vehicle
G WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
! Vehicles with a collapsible spare
wheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflate
the collapsible spare wheel with the tire
inflation compressor. The wheel rim could
otherwise be damaged.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Tightening the wheel nuts (example: vehicle with
an emergency spare wheel)
Turn the crank of the jack counterclockwise until the vehicle is once again
standing firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
crosswise pattern in the sequence
indicated (: to A). The specified
tightening torque is 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X
Positioning a wheel (example: vehicle with an
emergency spare wheel)
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are
finger-tight.
X
Z
Wheels and tires
G WARNING
361
Wheel and tire combinations
362
Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the trunk again.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly
mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 338).
X
i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all
wheels mounted must be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
Wheels and tires
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use tires and
wheels which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your
vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO
= Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
= Mercedes-Benz Original (only
certain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,
vehicle noise emissions or fuel
consumption, may otherwise be adversely
affected. In addition, when driving with a
load, tire dimension variations could cause
the tires to come into contact with the
bodywork and axle components. This could
result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
damage resulting from the use of tires,
wheels or accessories other than those
tested and approved.
RMO1
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of abbreviations used in the
following tire tables:
RBA:
both axles
front axle
RRA: rear axle
The recommended pressures for various
operating conditions can be found:
RFA:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
with the recommended tire pressures on
the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 338).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the
maintenance recommendations of the tire
manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle with:
Rtires
of the same size on a given axle (left/
right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
kit if you mount tires that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
may be obtained from a qualified specialist
workshop.
i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
available at the factory for all countries.
i On the following pages, you can find
information on approved wheel rims and
tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with
winter tires. Winter tires are not available
Wheel and tire combinations
363
Wheels and tires
at the factory as standard equipment or
optional extras.
If you would like to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, you may also, in
certain circumstances, require rims of the
appropriate size. The sizes of the approved
winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Z
Wheel and tire combinations
364
Tires
CLS 550
Summer tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Wheels and tires
R19
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL
RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
All-weather tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S
RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Winter tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V
M+SiMOExtended2
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tire pressure
loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.
3 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
2
Wheel and tire combinations
365
CLS 550 4MATIC
Summer tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL
RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Wheels and tires
R19
All-weather tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S
RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Winter tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V
M+SiMOExtended2
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tire pressure
loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.
3 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
2
Z
Wheel and tire combinations
366
CLS 63 AMG
Summer tires
R19
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL
RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL3
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
Wheels and tires
Winter tires
R19
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si3
CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC
Summer tires
R19
3
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL
RA: 285/30 ZR 19 (98 Y) XL3
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
Emergency spare wheel
367
Winter tires
R19
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type
of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
severely impair the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Radapt
your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size briefly.
not switch ESP® off.
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
Rdo
When using an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
3
Snow chains must not be mounted on
emergency spare wheels.
General notes
You should regularly check the pressure of
the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as
necessary (Y page 338). The applicable value
is found on the wheel or under "Technical
data" (Y page 370).
An emergency spare wheel may also be
mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
the speed limitation specified on the
emergency spare wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
i When you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
loss warning system or the tire pressure
monitor cannot function reliably. Only
restart the tire pressure loss warning
system/the tire pressure monitor when the
damaged wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:
after mounting an emergency spare wheel,
Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
Z
Wheels and tires
RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si3
368
Emergency spare wheel
the system may still display the tire
pressure of the removed wheel for a few
minutes. The value displayed for the
mounted emergency spare wheel is not the
same as the current tire pressure of the
emergency spare wheel.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel/
collapsible spare wheel
Removing the "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
The emergency spare wheel can be found in
the stowage well under the trunk floor.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 283).
X Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and
lift it up.
X Remove collapsible spare wheel ;.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 358).
Stowing a used collapsible spare
wheel
! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in
Wheels and tires
the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise,
moisture may get into the vehicle.
The emergency spare wheel can be found in
the stowage well under the trunk floor.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 283).
X Turn stowage tray ; counter-clockwise
and remove together with vehicle tool kit
tray :.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel =.
Removing the collapsible spare wheel
(AMG vehicles)
Take the following steps to stow a used
collapsible spare wheel. It will not otherwise
install into the spare wheel well. MercedesBenz recommends that you have this work
performed at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew
the valve insert from the valve and release
the air.
i Fully deflating the tires can take a few
minutes.
Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
Screw the valve cap back on.
X Remove the protective sheet from the
vehicle tool kit and pull it over the
collapsible spare wheel.
X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the
emergency spare wheel well under the
trunk.
X
X
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using
the tire inflation compressor before
lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could
otherwise be damaged.
! Do not operate the tire inflation
compressor for longer than eight minutes
at a time without a break. It may otherwise
overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be
operated again once it has cooled down.
Mount the collapsible spare wheel as
described (Y page 357).
The collapsible spare wheel must be
mounted before it is inflated.
X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of
the housing.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the
collapsible spare wheel.
X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the
valve.
X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire
inflation compressor is set to 0.
X Insert connector ? into the cigarette
lighter socket or into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter
(Y page 288). Observe the notes on
sockets (Y page 289).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock (Y page 147).
X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is
shown on pressure gauge =.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire
pressure.
X
The specified tire pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
X When the specified tire pressure has been
reached, press on/off switch A on the
electric air pump to 0.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock.
X If the tire pressure is higher than the
specified pressure, press pressure release
button ; until the correct tire pressure has
been reached.
X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from
the valve.
X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible
spare wheel valve again.
X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower
section of the blower housing.
X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the
vehicle.
Z
369
Wheels and tires
Emergency spare wheel
Emergency spare wheel
370
Technical data
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
Tires
Alloy wheels
T 155/70 R17 110 M4, 5
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
4.0 B x 17 H24, 5
Wheel offset: 1.34 in (34 mm)
T 155/60 R18 107 M
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
4.5 B x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
AMG vehicles
Wheels and tires
Collapsible spare wheel
4
5
Tires
Alloy wheels
175/50 – 19 97 P
Tire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)
6.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 0.55 in (14 mm)
Not in conjunction with Sports package code 950.
Not for CLS 550 and CLS 550 4MATIC.
371
372
372
372
372
373
379
Technical data
Useful information ............................
Information regarding technical
data ....................................................
Warranty ............................................
Identification plates .........................
Service products and filling capacities .....................................................
Vehicle data ......................................
372
Identification plates
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
Accessories warranties. These are available
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If you lose the Service and Warranty
Information booklet, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with
vehicle identification number (VIN)
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Information regarding technical data
i The data stated here specifically refers to
Technical data
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
X
Warranty
Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts
in accordance with the following warranty
terms and conditions:
RNew
Vehicle Limited Warranty
Systems Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon
Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
REmission
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
; VIN
= Paint code
Service products and filling capacities
373
Engine number
= Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle
identification plate is used only as an
example. This data is different for every
vehicle and can deviate from the data
shown here. You can find the data
applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.
VIN
: Emission control information plate,
including the certification of both federal
and Californian emissions standards
; Engine number (stamped into the
crankcase)
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling
capacities
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and
hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Slide the right-hand front seat to its
rearmost position.
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
X
H Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations:
RFuels
Ron
RCoolant
the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 373)
Ron the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 372)
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RBrake
fluid
RWindshield
RClimate
washer fluid
control system refrigerant
Z
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
; VIN
374
Service products and filling capacities
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
fluids.
Components and service products must be
matched. You should therefore only use
products that have been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at an authorized MercedesBenz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following
inscription on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe
(e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations
indicate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Technical data
RMB
Fuel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash
away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance
without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
assistance without delay. Do not induce
vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model
All models
Total
capacity
21.1 US gal
(80.0 l)
Model
Of which
reserve
All models (except for
AMG vehicles)
Approx.
2.4 US qt
(9.0 l)
All models (AMG vehicles)
Approx.
3.7 US gal
(14.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a
qualified specialist workshop and have the
fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
Service products and filling capacities
performance of the engine, only premiumgrade unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard premium-grade unleaded
gasoline is unavailable and unleaded
gasoline of a lower grade is used for
refueling, observe the following
precautions:
Ronly
fill the fuel tank to half full with
regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
as soon as possible.
Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.
Ravoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds above 3000 rpm.
Rnever refuel using fuel with a octane
number lower than 87. Otherwise,
engine failure could occur.
Only refuel using unleaded gasoline with a
minimum octane rating of 91. If gasoline with
a lower octane rating is used, engine damage
may occur.
If unleaded gasoline is unavailable and
gasoline of an octane grade lower than 91 is
used, observe the following precautions:
refuel using enough gasoline to reach
a gas station that offers unleaded gasoline.
RDo not under any circumstances refuel
using gasoline with a lower octane rating
than 87. Otherwise, immediate engine
damage may occur.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not
permitted. E10 fuel, a mixture of 10% ethanol
and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
label on the pump, ask the staff for
assistance.
Information on refueling (Y page 165).
Additives
! Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
not include additives for the removal and
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
must only be mixed with additives
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply
with the instructions for use on the product
label. More information about
recommended additives can be obtained
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
branded fuels that have additives.
Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This
causes unnecessary costs and could lead to
engine failure.
Carbon deposits may form if the availability
of gasoline with relevant additives is
insufficient (in certain regions). In this case,
Mercedes-Benz recommends additives
approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;
see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
ROnly
i For further information, consult a
qualified specialist workshop or on the
Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
Engine oil
General notes
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
specification other than is necessary to
fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do
not change the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer replacement
intervals than those prescribed. You could
otherwise cause engine damage or damage
to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil change.
Otherwise, you may damage the engine and
the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling engine oil
(Y page 373).
Z
Technical data
! To ensure the longevity and full
375
376
Service products and filling capacities
The engine oils are matched to the
performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and
service intervals. You should therefore only
use engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with maintenance
systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Technical data
Model
Engine
model
MB
Approval
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
278
229.5
CLS 63 AMG
CLS 63 AMG
4MATIC
157
229.5
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils
for AMG vehicles.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil
containers.
Engine oil viscosity
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
means that it is thin.
Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures. The table shows you which
SAE classifications are to be used. The lowtemperature characteristics of engine oils
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
strongly recommended that you carry out
regular oil changes using an approved engine
oil with the appropriate SAE classification.
Filling capacities
Brake fluid
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
G WARNING
Model
Capacity
All models (except
for AMG vehicles)
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
All models (AMG
vehicles)
With external oil
cooler: 9.0 US qt
(8.5 l)
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling brake fluid
(Y page 373).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Service products and filling capacities
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at
a qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not
spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
clean the antifreeze from components before
starting the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products, MB Specifications for
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
Comply with the important safety precautions
for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 373).
The coolant is a mixture of water and
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
the following tasks:
Rcorrosion
protection
protection
Rraising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the
coolant during operation is approximately
266 ‡ (130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
Rantifreeze
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
will not be dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in
accordance with MB Specifications for
Service Products 310.1.
The coolant is checked with every
maintenance interval at a qualified specialist
workshop.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is
filled with a coolant mixture that ensures
adequate antifreeze and corrosion
protection.
Filling capacities
Model
Capacity
All models (except
for AMG vehicles)
Approx. 13.0 US qt
(12.3 l)
All models (AMG
vehicles)
Approx. 11.5 US qt
(10.9 l)
i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion
inhibitor/antifreeze.
Z
Technical data
Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can
be obtained at any qualified specialist
workshop or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
377
Service products and filling capacities
378
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
could damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
level sensor may be damaged.
Technical data
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling washer fluid
(Y page 373).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB
WinterFit.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside
temperature.
X
RDown
to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB
WinterFit to 2 parts water.
RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB
WinterFit to 1 part water.
RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB
WinterFit to 1 part water.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
Type of refrigerant
The climate control system of your vehicle is
filled with refrigerants R-134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
Refrigerant R-134a
! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant.
Otherwise, the climate control system may
be damaged.
Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant
or replacing components, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
SAE standard J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control
system carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Vehicle data
Refrigerant instruction label
379
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe
Example: refrigerant instruction label
: Warning symbol
heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Rthe vehicle length specified includes the
front license plate adapter.
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable SAE standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbols : indicate:
Rpossible
dangers
service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop
Technical data
Rhaving
Filling capacities
All models
Capacity
Refrigerant
590 ± 10 g
(20.8 ± 0.4 oz)
PAG oil
120 g
(4.2 oz)
Z
380
Vehicle data
Dimensions and weights
All models (AMG
vehicles)
Vehicle length
196.7 in (4996 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
81.7 in (2075 mm)
Vehicle height
55.4 in (1406 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2874 mm)
Turning radius
Technical data
Model
Opening height :
All models (except
AMG vehicles)
69.8 in
(1772 mm)
CLS 63 AMG
70.0 in
(1777 mm)
CLS 63 AMG
4MATIC
71.1 in
(1806 mm)
All models (except
AMG vehicles)
Vehicle length
195.1 in (4956 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
81.7 in (2075 mm)
Vehicle height
55.3 in (1404 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2874 mm)
Turning radius
37.0 ft (11.27 m)
Maximum roof load
220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk
load
220 lb (100 kg)
37.1 ft (11.30 m)
Maximum roof load
220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk
load
220 lb (100 kg)